Panasonic PT-RZXXX Series Manual EN

Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
DLP™ Projector   Commercial Use
Model No. PT-RZ990

PT-RZ890
PT-RZ790
PT-RZ690
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
■■ The Operating Instructions correspond to the firmware’s main version 1.04 and higher.
■■ This manual is common to all the models regardless of suffixes of the Model No.
zzfor Taiwan
B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied
zzfor India
BD: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied LBD: Black model, the lens sold separately
zzfor Korea
B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied W: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied
zzfor other countries or regions
B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied LB: Black model, the lens sold separately
W: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied LW: White model, the lens sold separately
■■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
■■ Before using this product, be sure to read “Read this first!” (x pages 5 to 19).
ENGLISH
DPQP1335ZE/X1
Contents
Contents
Read this first! 5 Power indicator 59
Switching on the projector 60
When the initial setting screen is displayed 61
Chapter 1 Preparation
When the administrator account setting screen
is displayed 69
Precautions for use 23
Making adjustments and selections 71
Intended use of the product 23
Switching off the projector 72
Cautions when transporting 23
Cautions when installing 23 Projecting 73
Security 26 Selecting the input signal 73
DIGITAL LINK 27 Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift 74
Art-Net 27 Adjusting the focus balance 75
Application software supported by the projector 27 Setting the lens type 76
Storing 27 Moving the projection lens to the home position 76
Disposal 28 Lens shift range 77
Cautions on use 28 Operating with the remote control 79
Accessories 29 Using the shutter function 79
Optional accessories 30 Using the on-screen display function 79
About your projector 31 Using the automatic setup function 80
Remote control 31 Using the function button 80
Projector body 33 Displaying internal test pattern 80
Using the status function 81
Preparing the remote control 36
Setting ID number of the remote control 81
Inserting and removing the batteries 36
When using the multiple projectors 36
Chapter 4 Settings
Connecting the remote control to the projector
with a cable 36 Menu navigation 83
Navigating through the menu 83
Chapter 2 Getting Started
Main menu 84
Setting up 38 Sub-menu 85
Usable outlet 38 [PICTURE] menu 88
Installation mode 38 [PICTURE MODE] 88
Parts for installation (optional) 40 [CONTRAST] 88
Projected image and throw distance 40 [BRIGHTNESS] 88
Adjusting adjustable feet 49 [COLOR] 89
Removing/attaching the projection lens 50 [TINT] 89
Removing the projection lens 50 [COLOR TEMPERATURE] 89
Attaching the projection lens 51 [WHITE GAIN] 91
Connecting 52 [GAMMA] 91
Before connecting 52 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] 92
Connecting example: AV equipment 52 [SHARPNESS] 92
Connecting example: Computers 53 [NOISE REDUCTION] 93
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK 54 [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] 93
Connecting example when using the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] 94
contrast synchronization function/shutter [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] 95
synchronization function 55 sRGB-compliant video 95
[POSITION] menu 97
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
[SHIFT] 97
Switching on/off the projector 58 [ASPECT] 97
Connecting the power cord 58 [ZOOM] 98
[CLOCK PHASE] 99
2 - ENGLISH
Contents
[GEOMETRY] 99 [DATA CLONING] 158

[ADVANCED MENU] menu 105 [SAVE ALL USER DATA] 160
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 105 [LOAD ALL USER DATA] 160
[BLANKING] 105 [INITIALIZE] 160
[INPUT RESOLUTION] 106 [SERVICE PASSWORD] 161
[CLAMP POSITION] 106 [TEST PATTERN] menu 162
[EDGE BLENDING] 106 [TEST PATTERN] 162
[FRAME RESPONSE] 108 [SIGNAL LIST] menu 163
[RASTER POSITION] 109 Registering new signals 163
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu 110 Renaming the registered signal 163
Changing the display language 110 Deleting the registered signal 163
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu 111 Protecting the registered signal 164
[COLOR MATCHING] 111 Expanding signal lock-in range 164
[COLOR CORRECTION] 112 Sub memory 165
[SCREEN SETTING] 112 [SECURITY] menu 166
[AUTO SIGNAL] 113 [SECURITY PASSWORD] 166
[AUTO SETUP] 113 [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 166
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] 114 [DISPLAY SETTING] 166
[RGB IN] 116 [TEXT CHANGE] 167
[DVI-D IN] 117 [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 167
[HDMI IN] 119 [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 168
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 120 [NETWORK] menu 170
[SDI IN] 122 [ETHERNET TYPE] 170
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 123 [DIGITAL LINK] 170
[MENU MODE] 125 [WIRED LAN] 172
[IMAGE ROTATION] 125 [PROJECTOR NAME] 172
[BACK COLOR] 126 [NETWORK STATUS] 173
[STARTUP LOGO] 126 [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] 173
[UNIFORMITY] 126 [NETWORK SECURITY] 175
[SHUTTER SETTING] 127 [NETWORK CONTROL] 176
[FREEZE] 129 [PJLink] 176
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] 129 [Art-Net] 178
[CUT OFF] 130
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu 131 Chapter 5 Operations
[PROJECTOR ID] 131
Network connection 181
[PROJECTION METHOD] 131
Connecting to the network 181
[LENS] 132
Web control function 184
[OPERATION SETTING] 133
Computer that can be used for setting 184
[LIGHT OUTPUT] 140
Accessing from the web browser 184
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] 140
Updating the firmware 202
[STANDBY MODE] 144
Updating the firmware via LAN 202
[QUICK STARTUP] 144
[NO SIGNAL SETTING] 145 Chapter 6 Maintenance
[INITIAL STARTUP] 149
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 149 Light source/temperature indicators 208
[DATE AND TIME] 149 When an indicator lights up 208
[SCHEDULE] 150 Maintenance 210
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] 152 Before maintaining the projector 210
[RS-232C] 154 Maintenance 210
[REMOTE2 MODE] 156 Troubleshooting 211
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 156 [SELF TEST] indications 213
[STATUS] 156
ENGLISH - 3
Contents
Chapter 7 Appendix
Technical information 216
Using the PJLink function 216
Using Art-Net function 217
Control commands via LAN 221
<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC
IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC
OUT> terminals 225
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 229
<RGB 2 IN> terminal 230
Upgrade Kit 230
List of compatible signals 231
Specifications 238
Dimensions 241
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
Bracket 242
Index 244
4 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Read this first!

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid
incommoding reflexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct
field of view.
The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.
The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthing-
type mains plug. This plug will only fit an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32.
In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
(for Taiwan)
WARNING:
This equipment complies with the Class A standard of CNS13438.
This is Class A information technology equipment that may cause radio frequency interference when used in a
residential environment, in which the user will be required to take certain appropriate countermeasures.
CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using
the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a
domestic environment.
Directive 2009/125/EC
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
ENGLISH - 5
Read this first!
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN
Indicated on the projector
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
WARNING: Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
As with any bright source, do not stare into the direct beam, RG2 IEC 62471-5:2015.
Indicated on the projector
Notice on laser
(for USA and Canada)
This projector is the Class 3R laser product that complies with IEC 60825-1:2007.
For North America

“Complies with 21 CFR Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11
except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No.50 dated June 24.2007”
IEC 60825-1:2007
LASER RADIATION
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
WAVE LENGTH:448-462nm
MAXIMUM OUTPUT:248mW
PULSE DURATION:1.1ms
IEC 60825-1:2007
RAYONNEMENT LASER
EXPOSITION DIRECTE DANGEREUSE POUR LES YEUX
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 3R
LONGUEURS D'ONDES:448-462nm
MAXIMALE DU RAYONNEMENT:248mW
DURÉE DE L'IMPULSION:1.1ms
(Inside of product)
6 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
(for Taiwan)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
第 1 類雷射產品
(for India)
(for other countries or regions)

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

Power Supply: This Projector is designed to operate on 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only.
CAUTION: The AC power cord which is supplied with the projector as an accessory can only be used for
power supplies up to 125 V. If you need to use higher voltages than this, you will need to obtain a
separate 250 V power cord. If you use the accessory cord in such situations, fire may result.
ENGLISH - 7
Read this first!
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not
remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only fit a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.
Do not remove
WARNING (USA and Canada)
ff Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data
Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.
ff For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the
building installation wiring.
ff For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
For USA-California Only

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Australia Only
WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A COIN BATTERY

Keep coin battery out of the reach of infants and small children whether the battery is new or
used. Severe or fatal injuries can occur within 2 hours of ingestion. Seek medical attention
immediately.
8 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
FCC NOTICE (USA)

Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: PT-RZ990B / PT-RZ990W / PT-RZ990LB / PT-RZ990LW
PT-RZ890B / PT-RZ890W / PT-RZ890LB / PT-RZ890LW
Trade Name: Panasonic
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
Address: Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
General Contact: http://www.panasonic.com/support
Projector Contact: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided
power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.
ENGLISH - 9
Read this first!
IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse
is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.
If the fitted molded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colors of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is colored GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN - AND -
YELLOW.
The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or colored BLACK.
The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or colored RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
English Manufactured by: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Authorized Representative in EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Importer for UK:

Panasonic Connect UK,
a branch of Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH,
Maxis 2, Western Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1RT
Français Fabriqué par: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japon
Importateur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Représentant autorisé dans l’UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hambourg, Allemagne
10 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Español Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japón
Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Representante Autorizado para la UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemania
Deutsch Hergestellt von: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Vertretungsberechtigter in der EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Deutschland
Italiano Fabbricato da: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Giappone
Importatore: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Rappresentante autorizzato nell’UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Amburgo, Germania
Български Производител: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Япония
Вносител: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Упълномощен представител в ЕС: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Германия
Čeština Vyrobil: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko
Dovozce: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Oprávněný zástupce v EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburk, Německo
Dansk Fremstillet af: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autoriseret repræsentant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland
Eesti Tootja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Jaapan
Maaletooja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Volitatud esindaja ELis: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Saksamaa
Ελληνικά Κατασκευάστηκε από: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Ιαπωνία
Εισαγωγέας: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Εξουσιοδοτημένος αντιπρόσωπος στην ΕΕ: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Γερμανία
Hrvatski Proizvodi: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Ovlašteni zastupnik u EU-u: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Njemačka
Latviešu Ražotājs: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japāna
Importētājs: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Oficiālais pārstāvis ES: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Vācija
Lietuvių Gamintojas: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonija
Importuotojas: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Įgaliotasis atstovas ES: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgas, Vokietija
ENGLISH - 11
Read this first!
Magyar Gyártotta: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japán
Importőr: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Hivatalos képviselő az EU-ban: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Németország
Nederlands Geproduceerd door: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Bevoegde vertegenwoordiger in de EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Duitsland
Norsk Produsert av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autorisert representant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Polski Wyprodukowano przez: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia
Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Upoważniony przedstawiciel w UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Niemcy
Português Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japão
Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Representante Autorizado na UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemanha
Română Fabricat de: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia
Importator: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Reprezentant autorizat în UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germania
Slovenčina Výrobca: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko
Dovozca: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autorizovaný zástupca v EÚ: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemecko
Slovenščina Proizvaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonska
Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Pooblaščeni zastopnik v EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemčija
Suomi Valmistaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japani
Maahantuoja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Valtuutettu edustaja EU:ssa: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hampuri, Saksa
Svenska Tillverkad av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Importör: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Auktoriserad representant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Türkçe Tarafından Üretilmiştir: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonya
İthalatçı: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
AB Yetkili Temsilcisi: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Almanya
12 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
rrHazard distance (IEC 62471-5:2015)

The distance from the projection lens surface, at which the level of exposure has reached the level of the
applicable Exposure Limit Value, is known as the hazard distance (HD) or safety distance.
Do not look into the projected light from inside the hazard distance (within RG3 range). The eyes may be damaged
by the direct irradiation. It is considered to be safe to look into the projected light from outside the hazard distance
(within RG2 range).
HD HD
D3
D1 RG2 RG3
RG2 RG3
D2 D4
Except ET‑DLE035
rrRisk group
The combination of the projector and the projection lens is categorized as the risk group 2 when the hazard
distance is less than 1 m (39-3/8"). It is categorized as the risk group 3 when the hazard distance exceeds 1 m
(39-3/8"), and it will be for professional use instead of consumer use.
In case of risk group 3, there is a possibility of damaging the eyes by direct irradiation when looking into the
projection light from inside the hazard distance (within RG3 range).
In case of risk group 2, it can be used safely without damaging the eyes in any condition.
The combination of the projector and the projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8") and is
categorized as risk group 3 is as follows.
Projection lens Model No. Risk group

ET‑DLE250
ET‑DLE350 Risk group 3*1
ET‑DLE450
*1 When the projector is used with the optional Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE250, ET‑DLE350, ET‑DLE450) attached, the
hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8"), and regardless of the use condition, the throw ratio is larger than 2.2:1. In this case, it is
categorized as the risk group 3.
THIS PROJECTOR MAY BECOME RG3 FOR PROFESSIONAL USE

ONLY AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSUMER USE WHEN AN
INTERCHANGEABLE PROJECTION LENS IS USED UNDER THE
CONDITION THAT THROW RATIO IS GREATER THAN 2.2.
REFER TO THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS OR LEAFLET
FOR HAZARD DISTANCE BEFORE OPERATION.
CE PROJECTEUR PEUT DEVENIR RG3 POUR UNE UTILISATION
PROJECTION INTERCHANGEABLE EST UTILISÉ À CONDITION QUE

LE RAPPORT DE PROJECTION SOIT SUPÉRIEUR À 2,2.
PRENEZ CONNAISSANCE DE LA DISTANCE DU RISQUE AVANT DE
DIESER PROJEKTOR KANN ALS RG3 NUR FÜR DIE PROFESSIONELLE

VERWENDUNG EINGESTUFT WERDEN UND IST NICHT FÜR DIE
VERWENDUNG DURCH VERBRAUCHER KONZIPIERT, WENN EIN
AUSTAUSCHPROJEKTIONSOBJEKTIV VERWENDET WIRD, UNTER
DER VORAUSSETZUNG, DASS DAS PROJEKTIONSVERHÄLTNIS
ÜBER 2,2 LIEGT.
BEACHTEN SIE VOR DER BEDIENUNG DIE BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
UND DAS FALTBLATT IN BEZUG AUF DEN GEFÄHRDUNGSABSTAND.
ДАННЫЙ ПРОЕКТОР МОЖЕТ ВХОДИТЬ В ГРУППУ РИСКА RG3 —
ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПРОФЕССИОНАЛЬНОГО ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЯ, И ОН
НЕ ПРЕДНАЗНАЧЕН ДЛЯ ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЯ ПОТРЕБИТЕЛЯМИ
ПРИ ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИИ СМЕННЫХ ПРОЕКЦИОННЫХ
ОБЪЕКТИВОВ ПРИ УСЛОВИИ, ЧТО ПРОЕКЦИОННОЕ
ОТНОШЕНИЕ (THROW RATIO) БОЛЬШЕ ЧЕМ 2,2.
ПЕРЕД НАЧАЛОМ РАБОТЫ ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К ИНСТРУКЦИЯМ ПО
ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ ИЛИ БРОШЮРЕ, ЧТОБЫ УЗНАТЬ ПРО
ОПАСНОЕ РАССТОЯНИЕ.
이 프로젝터는 투사 비율이 2.2보다 큰 교체식 투사 렌즈를 사용한 경우,
전문가 전용인 RG3 등급이 될 수 있으며, 일반 소비자용이 아닙니다.
작동하기 전에 위험 거리에 대해서는 사용 설명서 또는 안내책자를
참조하십시오.
本投影機使用可換式投影鏡頭，且投射率大於 2.2 時，屬於僅

適合專業使用的RG3級產品，不能用作消費類電子產品。
操作前請先參閱使用說明書了解危險距離。
DPQT1477ZA
ENGLISH - 13
Read this first!
Each dimension inside the hazard distance (within RG3 range) for combination with projection lens which the
hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8") is as follows.
(Unit: m)
Projection lens
HD*1 D1*2 D2*2 D3*2 D4*2
Model No.
ET‑DLE250 1.4 0.40 0.27 0.52 0.39
ET‑DLE350 2.2 0.40 0.27 0.52 0.39
ET‑DLE450 3.2 0.40 0.27 0.51 0.38
*1 HD: Hazard Distance
*2 The values of D1 to D4 will change in accordance with the lens shift amount. Each value in the table is the maximum value.
Note
ff The value in the table is based on IEC 62471-5:2015.
14 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
WARNING:
rr POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock, or will cause visual
impairment.
ff If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
ff If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
ff If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.
ff Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or fire. Please note that if you do not use the provided power
cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
ff Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Use an outlet supporting 15 A independently.
Using an outlet together with another device may result in fires due to heat generation.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a fire.
ff If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
ff If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components. Oil
may also distort the plastic and the projector could fall such as when mounted on the ceiling.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector
or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
Do not install the projector in a location where people pass through.
People may bump into the projector or trip on the power cord, which may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.
Do not cover the intake/exhaust vents or place anything within 500 mm (19-11/16") of them.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.
ff Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
ff Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the intake vent.
ENGLISH - 15
Read this first!
WARNING:
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device (such as magnifier or mirror).
Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and switch
off the main power when you are away from the projector.
Do not project an image with the lens cover attached.
Doing so can cause fire.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.
ff For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
ff Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
ff If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
ff Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.
ff Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling should only be carried out by a qualified
technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
rr ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.
ff Do not use unspecified batteries.
ff Do not charge dry cell batteries.
ff Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
ff Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.
ff Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
ff Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
ff Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
ff Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
ff Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
ff Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
ff Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
ff Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not allow children to reach the batteries.
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
ff If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
ff Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
16 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks
will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from
the wall outlet.
ff Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.
ff Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.
ff Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.
Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not block the projection by placing an object in front of the projection lens.
Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
The projector must be carried or installed by two or more people.
Failure to do so may cause falling accidents.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to
occur.
When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with
metal parts inside the ceiling.
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
ENGLISH - 17
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr ACCESSORIES
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote
control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or
contamination of surrounding area.
rr MAINTENANCE
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated
duration.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.
ff For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery
1. Press the guide and lift the cover. 2. Remove the batteries.
(ii)
(i)
18 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Brazil Only
Brasil Apenas
rr Manuseio de baterias usadas
BRASIL
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão
ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.
Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa
destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper
a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1 Fita Isolante

Como isolar os terminais
Fita Isolante
Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a
garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo
devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a
temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre
do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos
terminais provocado internamente.
Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante
água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.
rr Remoção das baterias

1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa. 2. Remova as baterias.
(ii)
(i)
ENGLISH - 19

rrTrademarks
ffSOLID SHINE is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.
ffWindows, Internet Explorer, and Microsoft Edge are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
ffMac, macOS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
ffIOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
ffAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
ffTrademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other
countries and areas.
f DLP and the DLP logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Texas Instruments.
f
ffThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
ffCrestron Connected, the Crestron Connected logo, Crestron Fusion, Crestron RoomView, and RoomView
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries.
ffHDBaseTTM is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance.
ffArt-NetTM Designed by and Copyright Artistic Licence Holdings Ltd
ffAdobe, Acrobat, Flash Player, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
ffSome of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
ffAll other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Please note that the ® and TM symbols are not specified in this manual.
Software information regarding this product
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Please refer to the license terms and conditions of each open source software. The open source
software license is stored in the firmware of this product and can be downloaded by accessing the projector using
a web browser. For details, please refer to “Web control function” (x page 184).
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. will give to any third party who
contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing
source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under
GPL V2.0, LGPL V2.1 or the other licenses with the obligation to do so, as well as the respective copyright notice
thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
rrIllustrations in this manual

ffIllustrations of the projector, menu screen (OSD), and other parts may vary from the actual product.
ffIllustrations displayed on the computer screen may differ depending on the computer type and its operating
system.
ffIllustrations of the projector with the power cord attached are only examples. The shape of the supplied power
cords varies depending on the country where you purchased the product.
rrReference pages
ffReference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).
rrTerm
ffIn this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.
20 - ENGLISH

Features of the Projector Quick Steps
For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
High luminance and high contrast 1. Set up the projector.

(x page 38)
▶▶With a unique optical system which uses
a new-generation laser light source, and
the laser light source drive system, high 2. Attach the projection lens.
luminance of 9 400 lm*1*2 and high contrast
(x page 50)
of 10 000:1*3 are achieved even with its
compact size. This projector also supports
input of 4K video signals.
*1 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC] and
3. Connect with external devices.
[OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING] is set to (x page 52)
[NORMAL]
*2 PT-RZ990: 9 400 lm
PT-RZ890: 8 500 lm
PT-RZ790: 7 000 lm
PT-RZ690: 6 000 lm 4. Connect the power cord.
*3 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [OPERATING
MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING] is set to [NORMAL] and
(x page 58)
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3]
5. Switch on the projector.

Easy and highly flexible setup
(x page 60)
▶▶Easy and flexible setup is achieved by
compatibility with DIGITAL LINK and
Art-Net, standard support of 3G‑SDI, 6. Make initial settings.
standard support of geometric adjustment (x page 61)
function, 360° installation support including ffTake this step when you switch on the
horizontal, vertical, and portrait utilizing the power for the first time after purchasing the
characteristics of solid-state light source, projector.
and a lineup of various optional lenses.
7. Select the input signal.

Long life and high reliability (x page 73)
▶▶The maintenance cost for long-term

operation is reduced by the unique light 8. Adjust the image.
source cooling control technology and
(x page 74)
improvement of the dust resistance. Also,
it will contribute to the stable operation by
implementation of the backup function that
will continue the projection by switching to
the backup input signal immediately even
when the input signal is discontinued, in
addition to adopting solid-state light source
which has long life.
ENGLISH - 21
Chapter 1 Preparation
This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.
22 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use
Precautions for use

Intended use of the product
The purpose of the projector is to project a video signal from imaging equipment or a computer on a screen or
other surface as a still image or moving image.
Cautions when transporting

ffIf you purchased the projector with the standard zoom lens, remove the lens protection material before use, and
store it for the future use. Move the lens position to the home position and attach the lens protection material
when transporting.
If you purchased the projector with the lens sold separately, remove the lens hole cover before use, and store it
for the future use. Move the lens position to the home position, remove the projection lens, and attach the lens
hole cover when transporting.
For the steps to move the lens position to the home position, refer to “Moving the projection lens to the home
position” (x page 76).
Lens hole cover
Lens protection material
ffTransport the projector with two or more people. Failure to do so may drop the projector, which may result in
damage or deformation of the projector, or injury.
ffHold the bottom of the projector and do not hold the projection lens or the opening around the projection
lens when transporting. Failure to do so may cause damage. Also, handle the projector in a way not to apply
excessive vibration or shock. Failure to do so may cause a failure due to the damaged internal components.
ffDo not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
rrAfter attaching the projection lens, be sure to attach the Lens Mount Cover.
Not doing so may cause failure due to accumulating dust internally.
rrDo not set up the projector outdoors.

The projector is designed for indoor use only.
rrDo not set up the projector in the following locations.

ffPlaces where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal
components or malfunction.
ffLocation close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to
do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunction.
ffNear the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare
cases due to the heated air from the exhaust vent or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure
that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward
the front of the projector.
ffPlaces with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of
the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.
Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.
ffNear high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
ffPlaces where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface
causes damage to the DLP chips.
ENGLISH - 23
rrAsk a qualified technician or your dealer for the installation work such as installing to
a ceiling, etc.
To ensure projector performance and safety, ask a qualified technician or your dealer when installing to a ceiling or
in a high place.
rrAsk a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK
connection.
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate
installation.
rrThe projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast
station or the radio.
If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the
projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends.
rrFocus adjustment
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in
the period just after switching on the power.
It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern
displayed. For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 162).
rrDo not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') or higher above sea level.
rrDo not use the projector in a location that the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C
(113 °F).
Using the projector in a location that the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce the
life of the components or result in malfunctions.
rrProjection in all 360° direction is possible.

360°
360° 360°
360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted

(combination of vertical and horizontal)
24 - ENGLISH
rrCautions when setting up the projector

ffThe projector can be used by installing its top placed on the floor. To prevent the top surface from getting
scratched during use, it is recommended to attach about a 20 mm (25/32") square buffer material (such as
rubber cushion) on the four corners of the top surface.
Buffer material
Floor
Buffer material
ffUse the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other
purposes may damage the projector.
ffWhen installing the projector with a method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet, top placed
on the floor, or the ceiling installation with the Ceiling Mount Bracket, use the five screw holes for ceiling mount (as
shown in the figure) to fix the projector to the mount.
In such case, make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector
bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers (metallic) between them.
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten the fixing screws to their specified tightening torques.
Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 12 mm (15/32"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
Screw holes for ceiling mount (M6)
Adjustable feet Adjustable feet
Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet
ENGLISH - 25
ffDo not stack projectors on top of each other.

ffDo not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.
ffPrevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the intake/exhaust vents of the
projector.
500 mm (19-11/16") or longer 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer
500 mm (19-11/16") or longer
100 mm (3-15/16") or longer
ffDo not install the projector in a confined space.

When installing the projector in a confined space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat
may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage to the product caused by an inappropriate
choice of location for installing the projector, even if the warranty period of the product has not expired.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
ffPersonal information being leaked via this product
ffUnauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
ffInterfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufficient security measures.
ffMake your password difficult to guess as much as possible.
ffChange your password periodically.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge
your password in case you receive such inquiries.
ffThe connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.
26 - ENGLISH
DIGITAL LINK
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted
pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. to the HDBaseTTM communication standard
formulated by HDBaseT Alliance.
This projector supports the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G,
ET‑YFB200G) and peripheral devices by other manufacturers (twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the “XTP
transmitter” of Extron Electronics) that use the same HDBaseTTM standard. For the devices of other manufacturers
that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note
that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Connect
Co., Ltd., and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the
devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers. This projector does not support audio
transmission because it is not equipped with audio function.
Art-Net
“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol.
By using the DMX controller and the application software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net
is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.
Application software supported by the projector

The projector supports following application software. For details or downloading application software other than
the “Geometric & Setup Management Software, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffLogo Transfer Software
This application software transfers the original image, such as company logo, which is projected at the start, to
the projector.
f Smart Projector Control
f
This application software sets and adjusts the projector connected via LAN using a smartphone or a tablet.
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
This application software monitors and controls the multiple display devices (projector and flat panel display)
connected to an intranet.
ffEarly Warning Software
This plug-in software monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals within an intranet, and
notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality. “Early Warning
Software” is preinstalled in the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. To use the early warning function of
this plug-in software, install “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” in the PC to be used. By enabling the early
warning function, it will notify of the approximate time to replace the consumables for the display devices,
to clean each part of the display devices, and to replace the components of the display devices, allowing to
execute maintenance in advance.
The early warning function can be used by registering maximum of 2048 display devices free of charge for
90 days after installing the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” into a PC. To continuously use after the 90
days, it is necessary to purchase the license of “Early Warning Software” (ET‑SWA100 Series) and perform
the activation. Also, depending on the type of license, the number of display devices that can be registered for
monitoring varies. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
ffGeometric & Setup Management Software (Geometry Manager Pro)
This application software performs detailed corrections and adjustments such as the geometric adjustment
which cannot be covered by the projector settings in real-time. By applying the optional Upgrade Kit (Model
No.: ET‑UK20), the correctable range and functions can be expanded. Also, by applying the optional Auto
Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑CUK10), the geometric adjustment and edge blending matching
the shape of the screen using a camera, and the adjustments of color and luminance can be automatically
performed with simple steps.
“Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/
projector/pass/). It is necessary to register and login to PASS*1 to download.
*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website
For details, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/).
Storing
To store the projector, store in a dry room.
ENGLISH - 27
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the
product without disassembling.
Cautions on use
rrTo get a good picture quality

In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds
over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from
shining onto the screen.
rrDo not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and
projected onto the screen.
Attach the lens cover supplied with the projector or with the optional projection lens to the projector when you do
not use the projector.
rrDLP chips
ffThe DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always
lit. Such a phenomenon does not indicate malfunction.
f Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips.
f
rrDo not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.
Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.
rrLight source
The light source of the projector uses laser diode, and has the following characteristics.
ffDepending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease.
The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.
ffThe luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage.
If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the
projector or replace the light source unit.
rrComputer and external device connections

When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords
and shielded cables as well.
28 - ENGLISH
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the
number of accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control unit <1> For India
(N2QAYA000060) (K2CZ3YY00092) <1>
200 V - 240 V
Lens Mount Cover <1>

(Black model: 1GE1RZ970BU)
(White model: 1GE1RZ970WU)
Power cord
(K2CN3YY00018)
200 V - 240 V
(The same color as the outer case will be supplied.)

Lens cover <1>
(K2CT3YY00067) (TKKL5244‑1)
200 V - 240 V
(Only models with lens)
(K2CG3YY00174) AAA/R03 or AAA/LR03 battery <2>

100 V - 120 V
(For remote control unit)

For Taiwan
(K2CG3YY00145) <1>
100 V - 120 V
Attention
ff After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
ff Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
ff For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
ff Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Note
ff The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the
product.
ff The part numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ENGLISH - 29
Optional accessories
Optional accessories (product name) Model No.

ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105, ET‑DLE150,
Zoom Lens
Projection lens ET‑DLE170*1, ET‑DLE250, ET‑DLE350, ET‑DLE450
Fixed-focus Lens ET‑DLE035, ET‑DLE055
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
Ceiling Mount Bracket
ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)
ET‑PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)
Early Warning Software
ET‑SWA100 Series*2
(Basic license/3-year license)
Upgrade Kit ET‑UK20
Auto Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit ET‑CUK10
Auto Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit (PC) ET‑CUK10P
Digital Interface Box ET‑YFB100G
DIGITAL LINK Switcher ET‑YFB200G
*1 This product is equivalent to the lens attached to the projector models with standard zoom lens.
The availability of this product varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.
*2 The suffix of the Model No. differs according to the license type.
Note
ff The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ff The optional accessories compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice.
For the latest information, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
30 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1 Preparation — About your projector
About your projector

Remote control
Front Top
1
16
2
3
4
5 11
6 12
8
13 Bottom
14
9 17
10 15
1 Power standby <v> button 9 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons

Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector environment.
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode. 10 <AUTO SETUP> button
2 Power on <b> button Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN POWER> the image.
switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment.
off (standby mode). (x page 80)
3 Remote control indicator 11 <SHUTTER> button
Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed. Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 79)
4 Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) 12 <TEST PATTERN> button
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift. (x page 74) Displays the test pattern. (x page 80)
5 <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons 13 <STATUS> button
Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 83) Displays the projector information.
asqw buttons are also used to enter the password in 14 <DEFAULT> button
[SECURITY] or enter characters. Resets the setting of the displayed sub-menu to the factory
6 <ON SCREEN> button default. (x page 84)
Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off (hide). 15 <ID SET> button
(x page 79) Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector
7 Input selection buttons (<RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, environment. (x page 36)
<DVI-D>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) 16 Remote control signal transmitter
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 73)
17 Remote control wired terminal
The <VIDEO> button is not used with this projector.
This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable
8 <FUNCTION> button when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button. (x page 36)
(x page 80)
Attention
ff Do not drop the remote control.
ff Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
ff Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
ff Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control:
gg Do not use old battery with new one.
gg Do not use batteries other than the type specified.
ENGLISH - 31
gg Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.

For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this first!”.
Caution label at the back of the remote control
Note
ff When operating the remote control by directly pointing at the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control
within a distance approximately 30 m (98'5") from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30°
vertically and horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.
ff If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
ff The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.
ff If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use
it in a place distant from the light source.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
32 - ENGLISH
Projector body
Front Side
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
7 8 9 8 7
Rear
10 13 14 15
7 11 7 16 17 18
3 Light source indicator <LIGHT1>

Bottom Indicates the status of light source 1.
8 12
4 Light source indicator <LIGHT2>
Indicates the status of light source 2.
5 Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicates the internal temperature status.
6 (Not used with this projector)
7 Adjustable feet
Adjusts the projection angle.
8 Intake vent
9 Projection lens
(Only models with lens)
10 Remote control signal receiver (rear)
11 Exhaust vent
12 Burglar hook port
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
13 Control panel (x page 34)
14 Connecting terminals (x page 35)
15 Security slot
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security
8 8 cables.
Projection direction 16 <MAIN POWER> switch
Turns on/off the main power.
1 Remote control signal receiver (front) 17 <AC IN> terminal
2 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> Connect the supplied power cord.
Indicates the status of the power. 18 Power cord holder
Attention
ff Do not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.
ENGLISH - 33
rrControl panel
1
2 9
3 10
11
4
5
6 12
7 13
8 14
1 Power on <b> button 9 <MENU> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN POWER> Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 83)
switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.
off (standby mode). If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least
2 Power standby <v> button three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned on-screen display is turned on.
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the 10 <LENS> button
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode. Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift.
3 <RGB1> button 11 <ENTER> button
Switches the input to RGB1. Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
4 <RGB2> button 12 <SHUTTER> button
Switches the input to RGB2. Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 79)
5 <DVI-D> button 13 asqw selection buttons
Switches the input to DVI‑D. Used to select an item in the menu screen, change the setting,
6 <HDMI> button and adjust the level.
Switches the input to HDMI. Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter
characters.
7 <DIGITAL LINK> button
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK. 14 <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while the image
8 <SDI> button
is projected. [PROGRESS] is displayed during the automatic
Switches the input to SDI.
adjustment. (x page 80)
34 - ENGLISH
rrConnecting terminals
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal 5 <SDI IN> terminal
These are terminals to connect the remote control for serial This is a terminal to input the SDI signal.
control in a multiple projector environment. 6 <RGB 1 IN> terminals (<R/PR>, <G/Y>, <B/PB>, <SYNC/HD>,
2 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal <VD>)
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the These are terminals to input the RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR
external control circuit. signal.
3 <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal 7 <RGB 2 IN> terminal
This is the RS‑232C compatible terminal to externally control the This is a terminal to input the RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR
projector by connecting a computer. signal.
This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when 8 <DVI-D IN> terminal
balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing This is a terminal to input the DVI‑D signal.
the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade
9 <HDMI IN> terminal
out with a system using multiple projectors.
This is a terminal to input the HDMI signal.
4 <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal
10 <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
This is a terminal to output RS‑232C compliant signal input to
This is a terminal to connect a device that transmits video signal
the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal.
via the LAN terminal. Also, this is the LAN terminal to connect to
This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when
the network.
balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing
the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade 11 <LAN> terminal
out with a system using multiple projectors. This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network.
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
ff To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL
LINK].
ff The <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN
cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-
cable transmitter.
ENGLISH - 35
Chapter 1 Preparation — Preparing the remote control
Preparing the remote control

Inserting and removing the batteries
(ii)
(i)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)
2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2)
ffWhen removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
When using the multiple projectors
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings
have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial
setting screen is displayed” (x page 61).
The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use it
as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary.
For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”
(x page 81).
Note
ff Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable

To simultaneously control multiple projectors next to each other with one remote control, connect the remote
control with a commercially available M3 stereo mini jack cable using the <REMOTE 1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT>
terminals.
The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are
susceptible to outside light.
M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially available)

Remote control
Connecting to a second projector
Connecting to the remote

control wired terminal
Connecting terminals
Attention
ff Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds
15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
36 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2 Getting Started
This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.
ENGLISH - 37
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Setting up
Setting up
Usable outlet
This projector supports AC 100 V to AC 240 V as the power supply. A grounded outlet supporting 15 A is required
with either voltage.
The shape of the usable outlet differs depending on the power supply. Following illustrations are examples.
2P/3W 15 A 250 V 2P/3W 15 A 250 V
2P/3W 15 A 250 V 2P/3W 15 A 125 V
Attention
ff Use the supplied power cord and ground at the outlet.
ff Use the power cord matching the used power supply voltage and outlet shape.
Note
ff The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
Installation mode
The installation modes of the projector are as follows. Set [FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING] in the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] (x page 131) depending on the installation mode.
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item Setting value Menu item Setting value

[FRONT/REAR] [FRONT] [FRONT/REAR] [REAR]
[FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [FLOOR] [FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
38 - ENGLISH
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear

[FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [CEILING] [FLOOR/CEILING] [AUTO] or [CEILING]
Portrait setting and projecting forward Portrait setting and projecting from rear

Set in accordance with the image Set in accordance with the image
[FLOOR/CEILING] [FLOOR/CEILING]
to project. to project.
Note
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] (x page 123) and change the
[OSD ROTATION] setting.
ff The projector has a built-in angle sensor. The attitude of the projector is automatically detected by setting [FLOOR/CEILING] to [AUTO] in
the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].
rrAngle sensor
The range of the installation attitude that is detected by the angle sensor built-in the projector is as follows.
Floor standing installation
30°
Ceiling mount installation
30°
Floor standing installation

Projection direction
ENGLISH - 39
Parts for installation (optional)

The projector can be installed on the ceiling by combining the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis
Adjustment)) and the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
ffBe sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specified for this projector.
ffRefer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.
Attention
ff To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified
technician.
Projected image and throw distance

Install the projector referring to the projected image size and projection distance. Image size and image position
can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position. The projection relation between the
screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses, when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is
used. Refer to “Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035)” (x page 41) for details.
Attention
ff Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 23).
Especially when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used, install the projector so that its back plane is parallel to the screen,
making the projected image rectangular.
The vertical keystone distortion in moderate range can be corrected with the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] → [KEYSTONE] →
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (x page 100) even after the projector is installed. For the range that can be corrected, refer to “[GEOMETRY]
projection range” (x page 42).
ff Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the
projection lens surface.
Note
ff The optional Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE170) is equivalent to the lens attached to the projector models with standard zoom lens.
The availability of this product varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.
Figure of projected image and throw distance
Projected image
L1
SD Screen
SH
SH
L (LW/LT)
H
SW
L1
L (LW/LT)
SW
Screen
Note
ff This illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been aligned to fit full in the screen.
SH Projected image height

SW Projected image width
SD Projected image size
H Distance from the lens center to the bottom edge of the projected image
L*1 (LW/LT)*2 Projection distance (distance from the front end of the projection lens to the screen)
Lens protrusion dimension (distance from the front surface of the projector to the front end of the projection
L1
lens)
*1 For details about calculating the projection distance, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens” (x page 48).
*2 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
40 - ENGLISH
(Unit: m)
Projection lens Model No. Lens protrusion dimension (L1) (approximate value)
Standard zoom lens/
0.043
ET‑DLE170
ET‑DLE020 0.266
ET‑DLE055 0.027
ET‑DLE060 0.104
ET‑DLE085 0.084
ET‑DLE105 0.088
ET‑DLE150 0.044
ET‑DLE250 0.045
ET‑DLE350 0.051
ET‑DLE450 0.095
Note
ff For the adjustment range of the projected image position with the lens shift, refer to “Lens shift range” (x page 77).
rrFixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035)
Projected image
SD Screen
SH
SH
L2
L1
SW
L3
A1
A2
SW
L4
Screen
Note
ff This illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been aligned to fit full in the screen.
SH Projected image height

SW Projected image width
SD Projected image size
L1*1 Projection distance (distance from the mirror reflection surface*2 to the screen)
L2 Distance from the front end of the projection lens to the screen
L3 Distance from the front surface of the projector to the screen
L4 Distance from the back surface of the projector to the screen
A1*1 Distance from the top surface of the projector to the bottom edge of the screen
A2 Distance from the installation surface of the projector to the screen (adjustable feet at lowest position)
*1 For details about calculating the projection distance, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens” (x page 48).
*2 The mirror reflection surface cannot be seen from the outside because it is located inside the Fixed-focus Lens.
(Unit: m)
Distance from the projector

Formula
to the screen
L2 = L1 + 0.023
L3 = L1 - 0.166
L4 = L1 - 0.704
A2 = A1 + 0.200
ENGLISH - 41
Attention
ff The dimension of L4 is not the distance between the back surface of the projector and the wall, but the distance between the back surface of
the projector and the screen surface. Install the projector with 500 mm (19-11/16") or larger space between the back surface of the projector
and the wall or any object so that the ventilation is not obstructed.
When installing the projector in a confined space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat may accumulate when the
ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
Note
ff For the adjustment range of the projected image position with the lens shift, refer to “Lens shift range” (x page 77).
[GEOMETRY] projection range
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
Screen Screen
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
Projection distance Projection distance

Arc radius Arc radius
Screen Screen
Arc center Arc center
Screen Screen
Projection distance Projection distance

Arc radius Arc radius
42 - ENGLISH
Standard status
Only [CURVED
Only [KEYSTONE] used [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together
CORRECTION] used
Projection
lens Model Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
No. keystone keystone keystone keystone Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of
correction correction correction correction R2/L2 R3/L3 R2/L2 R3/L3
angle α (°) angle β (°) angle α (°) angle β (°)
Standard
zoom lens/ ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.7 0.5 1
ET‑DLE170
ET‑DLE020 ±5 0 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE035 *1
+5 / -0 0 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE055 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1 2.6
ET‑DLE060 ±16 ±10 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE085 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1 2.6
ET‑DLE105 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.7 4.3 1 2.6
ET‑DLE150 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 1.1 2.6 0.6 1.5
ET‑DLE250 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET‑DLE350 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.5
ET‑DLE450 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.6 0.2 0.3
*1 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
When using the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20)
Only [CURVED
Only [KEYSTONE] used*1 [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together
CORRECTION] used
Projection
lens Model Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
No. keystone keystone keystone keystone Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of
correction correction correction correction R2/L2 R3/L3 R2/L2 R3/L3
angle α (°) angle β (°) angle α (°) angle β (°)
Standard
zoom lens/ ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET‑DLE170
ET‑DLE020 ±5 0 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE035 *2
+5 / -0 0 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE055 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.3 3.3 0.8 1.9
ET‑DLE060 ±16 ±10 ― ― ― ― ― ―
ET‑DLE085 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.3 3.3 0.8 1.9
ET‑DLE105 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.3 3.3 0.8 1.9
ET‑DLE150 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.9 2 0.5 1.1
ET‑DLE250 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.5 1 0.3 0.6
ET‑DLE350 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.6 0.2 0.4
ET‑DLE450 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.
*2 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
Note
ff When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
ff Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
ff Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector
within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.
ENGLISH - 43
Projection distance of each projection lens

A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size.
rrWhen the screen aspect ratio is 16:10

(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Standard zoom
Projection lens Model No. ET‑DLE020 ET‑DLE060 ET‑DLE085 ET‑DLE105
lens/ET‑DLE170
Throw ratio*1 1.71‑2.41:1 0.280‑0.299:1 0.600‑0.801:1 0.782‑0.977:1 0.978‑1.32:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Height Width Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.82 2.57 ― ― 0.63 0.84 0.82 1.04 1.03 1.41
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 2.20 3.10 ― ― 0.76 1.02 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.70
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 2.58 3.63 ― ― 0.90 1.20 1.17 1.47 1.47 1.99
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 2.95 4.16 ― ― 1.03 1.38 1.35 1.68 1.68 2.28
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 3.33 4.69 ― ― 1.17 1.56 1.52 1.90 1.90 2.57
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 3.71 5.21 0.59 0.64 1.31 1.74 1.70 2.11 2.12 2.86
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 4.47 6.27 0.72 0.77 1.58 2.10 2.05 2.55 2.55 3.44
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 5.60 7.86 0.90 0.97 1.99 2.63 2.57 3.19 3.20 4.32
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 7.50 10.50 1.21 1.30 2.67 3.53 3.44 4.27 4.29 5.77
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 9.39 13.14 1.52 1.63 3.35 4.42 4.31 5.35 5.37 7.23
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 11.28 15.79 1.83 1.96 4.03 5.32 5.18 6.43 6.46 8.68
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 13.18 18.43 2.14 2.29 4.71 6.21 6.06 7.51 7.54 10.14
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 15.07 21.07 2.45 2.63 5.39 7.11 6.93 8.59 8.63 11.59
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 18.86 26.36 ― ― 6.75 8.90 8.67 10.75 10.80 14.50
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 22.64 31.65 ― ― 8.11 10.69 10.42 12.91 12.97 17.41
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size. When the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020) is
attached, the throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 3.81 m (150") projected image size.
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Throw ratio*1 1.30‑1.89:1 2.27‑3.62:1 3.58‑5.45:1 5.36‑8.58:1
Height Width Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Diagonal (SD)
(SH) (SW) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT) (LW) (LT)
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 1.38 2.01 2.42 3.87 3.80 5.81 5.66 9.12
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 1.66 2.43 2.92 4.65 4.59 7.00 6.85 11.01
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 1.95 2.84 3.42 5.44 5.38 8.19 8.04 12.89
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 2.23 3.25 3.92 6.23 6.16 9.38 9.23 14.78
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 2.52 3.66 4.42 7.02 6.95 10.57 10.43 16.66
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 2.81 4.08 4.92 7.81 7.74 11.76 11.62 18.55
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 3.38 4.90 5.91 9.39 9.31 14.14 14.00 22.31
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 4.24 6.14 7.41 11.75 11.68 17.71 17.58 27.97
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 5.67 8.20 9.91 15.70 15.61 23.66 23.54 37.39
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 7.10 10.26 12.41 19.64 19.55 29.61 29.50 46.81
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 8.53 12.33 14.91 23.59 23.49 35.56 35.46 56.24
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 9.96 14.39 17.40 27.53 27.42 41.51 41.42 65.66
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 11.39 16.45 19.90 31.48 31.36 47.46 47.38 75.08
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 14.25 20.58 24.90 39.37 39.23 59.36 59.30 93.93
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 17.11 24.70 29.89 47.25 47.11 71.25 71.22 112.77
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
44 - ENGLISH
(Unit: m)
Lens type Height position (H) Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. Standard ET‑DLE055 ET‑DLE035*1
Throw ratio*2 zoom lens/ 0.785:1 0.380:1
ET‑DLE170/ Distance from the
Projected image size ET‑DLE085/ projector to the
ET‑DLE105/ ET‑DLE060 ET‑DLE020 Projection Height Projection screen
ET‑DLE150/ distance position distance
Height Width ET‑DLE250/ (L) (H)*3 (L1)
Diagonal (SD) ET‑DLE350/ (L4) (A1)
(SH) (SW)
ET‑DLE450
1.27 (50") 0.673 1.077 0 - 0.44 0.07 - 0.44 ― 0.83 0.34 ― ― ―
1.52 (60") 0.808 1.292 0 - 0.53 0.08 - 0.53 ― 1.00 0.40 ― ― ―
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 0 - 0.62 0.09 - 0.62 ― 1.18 0.47 ― ― ―
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 0 - 0.71 0.11 - 0.71 ― 1.35 0.54 ― ― ―
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 0 - 0.80 0.12 - 0.80 ― 1.53 0.61 ― ― ―
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 0 - 0.89 0.13 - 0.89 0.00 - 0.89 1.70 0.67 0.82 0.11 0.43
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 0 - 1.07 0.16 - 1.07 0.00 - 1.07 2.05 0.81 0.98 0.28 0.53
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 0 - 1.33 0.20 - 1.33 0.00 - 1.33 2.58 1.01 1.23 0.52 0.68
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 0 - 1.78 0.27 - 1.78 0.00 - 1.78 3.45 1.35 1.63 0.93 0.93
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 0 - 2.22 0.34 - 2.22 0.00 - 2.22 ― ― 2.04 1.34 1.18
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 0 - 2.67 0.40 - 2.67 0.00 - 2.67 ― ― 2.45 1.74 1.43
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 0 - 3.11 0.47 - 3.11 0.00 - 3.11 ― ― 2.85 2.15 1.69
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 0 - 3.55 0.54 - 3.55 0.00 - 3.55 ― ― ― ― ―
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 0 - 4.44 0.67 - 4.44 ― ― ― ― ― ―
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 0 - 5.33 0.81 - 5.33 ― ― ― ― ― ―
*1 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035)” (x page 41) for details.
*2 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is
*3 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes the fixed
value of SH/2.

(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑DLE170
Throw ratio*1 1.72‑2.41:1 0.280‑0.299:1 0.600‑0.802:1 0.783‑0.977:1 0.979‑1.32:1
Diagonal (SD)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.87 2.64 ― ― 0.64 0.87 0.85 1.07 1.06 1.45
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 2.26 3.19 ― ― 0.78 1.05 1.03 1.29 1.29 1.75
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.65 3.73 ― ― 0.92 1.24 1.21 1.51 1.51 2.05
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 3.04 4.27 ― ― 1.06 1.42 1.39 1.73 1.73 2.35
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 3.43 4.82 ― ― 1.20 1.60 1.57 1.95 1.96 2.64
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 3.82 5.36 0.61 0.65 1.34 1.79 1.75 2.17 2.18 2.94
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 4.60 6.45 0.74 0.79 1.62 2.16 2.10 2.62 2.63 3.54
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 5.76 8.08 0.93 0.99 2.04 2.71 2.64 3.28 3.29 4.44
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 7.71 10.80 1.25 1.34 2.74 3.63 3.54 4.39 4.41 5.93
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 9.65 13.51 1.56 1.68 3.44 4.55 4.43 5.50 5.52 7.43
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 11.60 16.23 1.88 2.02 4.14 5.47 5.33 6.61 6.64 8.93
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 13.55 18.95 2.20 2.36 4.84 6.39 6.23 7.72 7.76 10.42
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 15.49 21.66 2.52 2.70 5.54 7.31 7.12 8.83 8.87 11.92
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 19.38 27.10 ― ― 6.93 9.15 8.91 11.05 11.10 14.91
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 23.27 32.53 ― ― 8.33 10.99 10.71 13.27 13.33 17.90
ENGLISH - 45
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Throw ratio*1 1.30‑1.89:1 2.27‑3.62:1 3.58‑5.45:1 5.36‑8.58:1
Diagonal (SD)
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 1.42 2.07 2.49 3.97 3.91 5.98 5.82 9.39
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 1.71 2.49 3.00 4.79 4.72 7.20 7.05 11.32
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 2.00 2.92 3.51 5.60 5.53 8.43 8.27 13.26
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 2.30 3.34 4.03 6.41 6.34 9.65 9.50 15.20
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 2.59 3.77 4.54 7.22 7.15 10.87 10.72 17.13
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 2.89 4.19 5.05 8.03 7.96 12.09 11.95 19.07
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 3.47 5.04 6.08 9.65 9.58 14.54 14.40 22.94
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 4.36 6.31 7.62 12.08 12.00 18.21 18.08 28.75
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 5.82 8.43 10.19 16.14 16.05 24.32 24.20 38.44
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 7.29 10.55 12.75 20.19 20.10 30.44 30.33 48.12
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 8.76 12.67 15.32 24.25 24.14 36.55 36.45 57.81
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 10.23 14.79 17.89 28.30 28.19 42.67 42.58 67.49
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 11.70 16.91 20.46 32.35 32.24 48.78 48.71 77.18
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 14.64 21.15 25.59 40.46 40.33 61.01 60.96 96.55
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 17.58 25.39 30.72 48.57 48.42 73.24 73.21 115.91
(Unit: m)
(SH) (SW)
ET‑DLE450
1.27 (50") 0.623 1.107 -0.06 - 0.46 0.00 - 0.46 ― 0.85 0.31 ― ― ―
1.52 (60") 0.747 1.328 -0.07 - 0.55 0.00 - 0.55 ― 1.03 0.37 ― ― ―
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 -0.09 - 0.64 0.00 - 0.64 ― 1.21 0.44 ― ― ―
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 -0.10 - 0.73 0.00 - 0.73 ― 1.39 0.50 ― ― ―
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 -0.11 - 0.82 0.00 - 0.82 ― 1.57 0.56 ― ― ―
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 -0.12 - 0.91 0.00 - 0.91 -0.12 - 0.91 1.75 0.62 0.84 0.14 0.51
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 -0.15 - 1.10 0.00 - 1.10 -0.15 - 1.10 2.11 0.75 1.01 0.30 0.63
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 -0.19 - 1.37 0.00 - 1.37 -0.19 - 1.37 2.65 0.93 1.26 0.56 0.81
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 -0.25 - 1.83 0.00 - 1.83 -0.25 - 1.83 3.55 1.25 1.68 0.97 1.10
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 -0.31 - 2.28 0.00 - 2.28 -0.31 - 2.28 ― ― 2.10 1.39 1.39
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 -0.37 - 2.74 0.00 - 2.74 -0.37 - 2.74 ― ― 2.51 1.81 1.68
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 -0.44 - 3.20 0.00 - 3.20 -0.44 - 3.20 ― ― 2.93 2.23 1.98
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 -0.50 - 3.65 0.00 - 3.65 -0.50 - 3.65 ― ― ― ― ―
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 -0.62 - 4.57 0.00 - 4.57 ― ― ― ― ― ―
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 -0.75 - 5.48 0.00 - 5.48 ― ― ― ― ― ―
value of SH/2.
46 - ENGLISH

(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Standard zoom
lens/ET‑DLE170
Throw ratio *1
2.06‑2.90:1 0.337‑0.361:1 0.724‑0.965:1 0.943‑1.18:1 1.18‑1.59:1
Diagonal (SD)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 2.07 2.92 ― ― 0.71 0.96 0.94 1.18 1.18 1.60
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 2.50 3.52 ― ― 0.87 1.16 1.14 1.42 1.42 1.93
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.93 4.12 ― ― 1.02 1.37 1.33 1.67 1.67 2.26
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 3.35 4.72 ― ― 1.18 1.57 1.53 1.91 1.91 2.59
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 3.78 5.31 ― ― 1.33 1.77 1.73 2.16 2.16 2.92
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 4.21 5.91 0.67 0.72 1.48 1.97 1.93 2.40 2.41 3.25
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 5.07 7.11 0.81 0.87 1.79 2.38 2.32 2.89 2.90 3.91
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 6.35 8.91 1.03 1.10 2.25 2.99 2.91 3.62 3.63 4.89
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 8.50 11.90 1.38 1.47 3.02 4.00 3.90 4.84 4.86 6.54
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 10.64 14.89 1.73 1.85 3.79 5.01 4.89 6.07 6.09 8.19
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 12.78 17.88 2.08 2.23 4.56 6.03 5.88 7.29 7.32 9.84
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 14.93 20.88 2.43 2.60 5.33 7.04 6.86 8.51 8.55 11.48
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 17.07 23.87 2.78 2.98 6.10 8.05 7.85 9.73 9.78 13.13
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 21.36 29.85 ― ― 7.64 10.08 9.82 12.17 12.23 16.42
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 25.64 35.84 ― ― 9.18 12.11 11.80 14.62 14.69 19.72
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Throw ratio*1 1.56‑2.27:1 2.73‑4.35:1 4.30‑6.55:1 6.46‑10.3:1
Diagonal (SD)
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 1.56 2.29 2.75 4.39 4.32 6.60 6.45 10.37
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 1.89 2.75 3.31 5.28 5.21 7.95 7.80 12.50
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 2.21 3.22 3.88 6.17 6.10 9.29 9.14 14.63
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 2.54 3.69 4.44 7.07 7.00 10.64 10.49 16.77
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 2.86 4.15 5.01 7.96 7.89 11.99 11.84 18.90
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 3.18 4.62 5.57 8.85 8.78 13.34 13.19 21.03
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 3.83 5.55 6.71 10.64 10.56 16.03 15.89 25.30
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 4.80 6.96 8.40 13.32 13.24 20.07 19.94 31.70
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 6.42 9.29 11.23 17.78 17.69 26.80 26.69 42.37
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 8.04 11.63 14.06 22.25 22.15 33.54 33.44 53.04
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 9.66 13.96 16.88 26.71 26.61 40.27 40.18 63.70
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 11.28 16.30 19.71 31.18 31.06 47.01 46.93 74.37
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 12.90 18.63 22.54 35.64 35.52 53.74 53.68 85.04
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 16.13 23.30 28.19 44.58 44.43 67.21 67.17 106.37
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 19.37 27.97 33.85 53.51 53.35 80.68 80.67 127.70
ENGLISH - 47
(Unit: m)
(SH) (SW)
ET‑DLE450
1.27 (50") 0.762 1.016 0 - 0.50 0.08 - 0.50 ― 0.94 0.38 ― ― ―
1.52 (60") 0.914 1.219 0 - 0.60 0.09 - 0.60 ― 1.14 0.46 ― ― ―
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 0 - 0.70 0.11 - 0.70 ― 1.34 0.53 ― ― ―
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 0 - 0.80 0.12 - 0.80 ― 1.54 0.61 ― ― ―
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 0 - 0.91 0.14 - 0.91 ― 1.74 0.69 ― ― ―
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 0 - 1.01 0.15 - 1.01 0.00 - 1.01 1.93 0.76 0.93 0.22 0.50
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 0 - 1.21 0.18 - 1.21 0.00 - 1.21 2.33 0.91 1.11 0.41 0.61
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 0 - 1.51 0.23 - 1.51 0.00 - 1.51 2.93 1.14 1.39 0.68 0.78
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 0 - 2.01 0.30 - 2.01 0.00 - 2.01 3.92 1.52 1.85 1.14 1.06
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 0 - 2.51 0.38 - 2.51 0.00 - 2.51 ― ― 2.31 1.60 1.35
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 0 - 3.02 0.46 - 3.02 0.00 - 3.02 ― ― 2.77 2.07 1.63
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 0 - 3.52 0.53 - 3.52 0.00 - 3.52 ― ― 3.23 2.53 1.92
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 0 - 4.02 0.61 - 4.02 0.00 - 4.02 ― ― ― ― ―
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 0 - 5.03 0.76 - 5.03 ― ― ― ― ― ―
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 0 - 6.04 0.91 - 6.04 ― ― ― ― ― ―
value of SH/2.
Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens

To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the
respective formula to calculate projection distance.
The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)
When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches
by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.
rrZoom lens
Projection distance (L) formula
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.71 - 2.41:1 16:10 = 1.4906 x SD - 0.0746 = 2.0814 x SD - 0.0725
Standard zoom lens/ET‑DLE170 1.72 - 2.41:1 16:9 = 1.5320 x SD - 0.0746 = 2.1393 x SD - 0.0725
2.06 - 2.90:1 4:3 = 1.6874 x SD - 0.0746 = 2.3563 x SD - 0.0725
0.280 - 0.299:1 16:10 = 0.2438 x SD - 0.0266 = 0.2612 x SD - 0.0279
ET‑DLE020 0.280 - 0.299:1 16:9 = 0.2506 x SD - 0.0266 = 0.2684 x SD - 0.0279
0.337 - 0.361:1 4:3 = 0.2760 x SD - 0.0266 = 0.2957 x SD - 0.0279
0.600 - 0.801:1 16:10 = 0.5354 x SD - 0.0549 = 0.7047 x SD - 0.0518
ET‑DLE060 0.600 - 0.802:1 16:9 = 0.5503 x SD - 0.0549 = 0.7243 x SD - 0.0518
0.724 - 0.965:1 4:3 = 0.6062 x SD - 0.0549 = 0.7978 x SD - 0.0518
0.782 - 0.977:1 16:10 = 0.6865 x SD - 0.0471 = 0.8498 x SD - 0.0442
ET‑DLE085 0.783 - 0.977:1 16:9 = 0.7056 x SD - 0.0471 = 0.8735 x SD - 0.0442
0.943 - 1.18:1 4:3 = 0.7772 x SD - 0.0471 = 0.9621 x SD - 0.0442
0.978 - 1.32:1 16:10 = 0.8543 x SD - 0.0511 = 1.1457 x SD - 0.0472
ET‑DLE105 0.979 - 1.32:1 16:9 = 0.8781 x SD - 0.0511 = 1.1775 x SD - 0.0472
1.18 - 1.59:1 4:3 = 0.9672 x SD - 0.0511 = 1.2970 x SD - 0.0472
1.30 - 1.89:1 16:10 = 1.1259 x SD - 0.0540 = 1.6243 x SD - 0.0498
ET‑DLE150 1.30 - 1.89:1 16:9 = 1.1572 x SD - 0.0540 = 1.6695 x SD - 0.0498
1.56 - 2.27:1 4:3 = 1.2747 x SD - 0.0540 = 1.8388 x SD - 0.0498
48 - ENGLISH
Projection distance (L) formula

Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.27 - 3.62:1 16:10 = 1.9665 x SD - 0.0800 = 3.1059 x SD - 0.0792
ET‑DLE250 2.27 - 3.62:1 16:9 = 2.0212 x SD - 0.0800 = 3.1923 x SD - 0.0792
2.73 - 4.35:1 4:3 = 2.2263 x SD - 0.0800 = 3.5161 x SD - 0.0792
3.58 - 5.45:1 16:10 = 3.1000 x SD - 0.1351 = 4.6843 x SD - 0.1346
ET‑DLE350 3.58 - 5.45:1 16:9 = 3.1862 x SD - 0.1351 = 4.8146 x SD - 0.1346
4.30 - 6.55:1 4:3 = 3.5094 x SD - 0.1351 = 5.3030 x SD - 0.1346
5.36 - 8.58:1 16:10 = 4.6931 x SD - 0.3017 = 7.4193 x SD - 0.2991
ET‑DLE450 5.36 - 8.58:1 16:9 = 4.8236 x SD - 0.3017 = 7.6256 x SD - 0.2991
6.46 - 10.3:1 4:3 = 5.3129 x SD - 0.3017 = 8.3992 x SD - 0.2991
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
0.785:1 16:10 = 0.6893 x SD - 0.0476
ET‑DLE055 0.786:1 16:9 = 0.7084 x SD - 0.0476
0.946:1 4:3 = 0.7803 x SD - 0.0476
Projection distance (L1) Distance (A1) formula from

formula the projector to the screen
0.380:1 16:10 = 0.3205 x SD + 0.0047 = 0.1977 x SD - 0.0721
ET‑DLE035 0.380:1 16:9 = 0.3294 x SD + 0.0047 = 0.2304 x SD - 0.0721
0.456:1 4:3 = 0.3628 x SD + 0.0047 = 0.2238 x SD - 0.0721
Adjusting adjustable feet

Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the
projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, extend the front adjustable feet so that the projected image becomes rectangular.
The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.
Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the figure. Turning them in the opposite direction will
return them to the original position.
Maximum adjustable range

Adjustable feet: 30 mm (1-3/16") each
Attention
ff Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust vents with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is
on. (x page 33)
ENGLISH - 49
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
Removing/attaching the projection lens

Removing and attaching methods of the projection lens are basically the same for both standard zoom lenses and
optional lenses.
Move the lens position to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 76)
Attention
ff Replace the projection lens after turning off the projector.
ff Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.
ff Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
ff Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
ff Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from the use of projection lenses
which are not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. Be sure to use the specified projection lenses.
Note
ff In case of the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105), attachment/removal procedures of the Lens
Mount Cover are different. Refer to the Operating Instructions of ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, or ET‑DLE105 for details.
ff In case of the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035), precautions on handling the lens and attachment/removal procedures of the Lens
Mount Cover are different. Refer to the Operating Instructions of ET‑DLE035 for details.
ff For the adjustment procedure of the focus, zoom, and lens shift after attaching the projector lens, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and
lens shift” (x page 74).
ff For the adjustment procedure of the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image when the Zoom Lens (Model No.:
ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105) is used, refer to “Adjusting the focus balance” (x page 75).
Removing the projection lens

Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.
Lens Mount Cover

Projection lens
(iii)
(i)
(ii)
(ii)
(i) Lens release button

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Turn the Lens Mount Cover counterclockwise and remove. (Fig. 1)
2) While pressing the lens release button, turn the projection lens counterclockwise to the end and
remove. (Fig. 2)
Attention
ff Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.
50 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens
Attaching the projection lens

Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.
Guide groove
Guide
(i)
(ii)
Projection lens
Lens Mount Cover
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
1) Remove the Lens Mount Cover, and align the projection lens guide to the guide groove of the
projector and insert to the end. (Fig. 1)
2) Turn the projection lens clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 2)
3) Attach the Lens Mount Cover. (Fig. 3)

ffAlign the Lens Mount Cover and the projector at the dashed line positions in the figure to attach, and turn
the Lens Mount Cover clockwise to fix it to the projector.
Attention
ff Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out.
ff After attaching the projection lens, turn on the projector and confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting. Change the setting if the type does not match
the projection lens attached to the projector. (x page 76)
ENGLISH - 51
Chapter 2 Getting Started — Connecting
Connecting
Before connecting
ffBefore connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
ffTurn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
ffTake note of the following points before connecting the cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.
ggWhen connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby
metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.
ggDo not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer
the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an
antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
ggWhen connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a
straight manner.
ff Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied
with the device nor available as an option.
ffIf synchronization signals output from computers or video equipment are disrupted due to changes in the video
output setting or other reasons, colors of projected images may be temporarily disrupted.
ffThe projector accepts YCBCR/YPBPR signals, analog RGB signals (synchronization signals are TTL level), and
digital signals.
ffSome computer models or graphic cards are not compatible with the projector.
ffConnect using an extension device, etc., when installing the projector away from the video equipment. The
projector may not display the image properly when it is connected directly using a long cable.
ffFor details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”
(x page 231).
Connecting example: AV equipment
For <HDMI IN>/<DVI-D IN> terminals
DVD player with HDMI terminal (HDCP) Blu-ray disc player
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected
external device when DVI‑D signal is input.
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected
external device when HDMI signal is input.
ff The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected with the HDMI and DVI‑D compatible devices. However, some external devices may not be able
to project images properly, such as the image not displaying.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K video signal
exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed
transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.
gg A video signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit
Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when a video signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is
input.
ff The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI‑D terminal using an HDMI/DVI
conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be projected.
ff This projector does not support the VIERA Link (HDMI) and HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control).
52 - ENGLISH
For <SDI IN> terminal
Digital VCR for commercial use
SD-SDI signal, HD-SDI signal, or 3G-SDI

signal
Note
ff Setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] may be necessary depending on the connected external device.
ff Use a connection cable 5C‑FB or higher (such as 5C‑FB or 7C‑FB), or Belden 1694A or higher to properly transmit the image. Use a
connection cable with length of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
ff An error in signal detection may occur when an unsteady signal is connected. In such case, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] to
the content corresponding to the input signal.
Connecting example: Computers
Control computer
Computer
Computer
Control computer
Computer
Computer
Attention
ff When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially
available shielded cables.
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected
external device when DVI‑D signal is input.
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected
external device when HDMI signal is input.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K video signal
exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed
transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.
gg A video signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit
Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when a video signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is
input.
ff The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI‑D terminal using an HDMI/DVI
conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.
ff The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.
ff When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the <VD> terminal.
ff If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate
the projector.
ENGLISH - 53
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK

Twisted-pair-cable transmitters based on the communication standard HDBaseTTM such as the optional DIGITAL
LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) use twisted pair cables to transmit input
images, Ethernet, and serial control signals, and the projector can input those digital signals to the <DIGITAL
LINK/LAN> terminal.
Computer
Computer cable
(commercially available)
Projector connecting terminals Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
Switching hub
VCR Blu-ray disc player

(with built-in TBC)
Control computer*1
*1 Control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
Attention
ff Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
gg Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).
gg Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
ff The image may be disrupted when nonstandard burst signal is connected. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between
the projector and the external devices.
ff Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may
be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
gg Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.)
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
ff Do not use a switching hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
ff When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-pair-
cable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause image to be disrupted.
LINK].
cable transmitter.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL
QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality. (x page 171)
54 - ENGLISH
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DIGITAL LINK IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the
connected external device when DIGITAL LINK signal is input.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
ff The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI) and HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control).
ff The optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G) and the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET‑YFB200G) do not
support the input and output of the 4K video signal.
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication
method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz)
for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN
communication. Please note that Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. does not support the use of the projector outside the maximum transmission
distance. When connecting with the long reach, video signal or distance that can be transmitted may be restricted, depending on the
specification of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the website (https://
panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic
Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other
manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter

synchronization function
In a case to construct a multi-display by linking projected images from multiple projectors, following functions can
be used by synchronizing multiple projectors using the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the
<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal.
ffContrast synchronization function
A linked screen with balanced contrast can be displayed by sharing the brightness level of the video signal being
input to each projector.
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each
synchronized projector as follows.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that is synchronized. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [CONTRAST SYNC] to [ON].
ffShutter synchronization function
This is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the
effect using the shutter function including the fade out/fade in operation can be synchronized.
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each
synchronized projector as follows.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source within the linked
projectors. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON].
ENGLISH - 55
rrConnecting example
Connect all the projectors to be linked in a loop by daisy chain connection when using the contrast synchronization
function/shutter synchronization function. The number of linked projectors is limited to the maximum of 64
projectors.
Communication cable (straight all connected) Communication cable (straight all connected)
Connecting terminals of the first projector Connecting terminals of the second projector
Connecting terminals of the fourth projector Connecting terminals of the third projector
Communication cable (straight all connected) Communication cable (straight all connected)
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.
ff For details on the settings of the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] (x page 152).
ff The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items.
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
ff If there are any projectors which you do not want to synchronize within the linked projectors, set [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER
SYNC] to [OFF] individually.
56 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations to start with.
ENGLISH - 57
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Switching on/off the projector

Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the <AC IN> terminal of the projector to
prevent it from being removed easily.
Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the supplied power cord to the
projector.
Use the power cord matching with the power supply voltage and the shape of the outlet.
For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this first!” (x page 5). For the shape of the outlet, refer to
“Usable outlet” (x page 38).
Note
ff The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
ff The shape of the power cord holder may differ depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
How to attach the power cord
Power cord holder
Fig.1 Fig.2
Fig.3 Fig.4
1) Confirm that the power cord holder is raised so that the power cord can be inserted. (Fig. 1)
2) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector,
then insert the connector completely in the correct direction. (Fig. 2)
3) Lower the power cord holder. (Fig. 3)
4) Press down the power cord holder until the end of the power cord holder snaps onto the power cord
to secure the power cord. (Fig. 4)
ffWhen pressing down and snapping the power cord holder onto the power cord, hold the power cord from
the opposite side to avoid excessive force to be applied on the <AC IN> terminal.
58 - ENGLISH
How to remove the power cord
Fig.1 Fig.2
1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector is on the <OFF> side, and remove
the power plug from the outlet.
2) Raise the power cord holder fixing the power cord upward. (Fig. 1)
ffFix the power cord holder by snapping into the projector.
3) While holding the power cord connector, pull out the power cord from the <AC IN> terminal of the
projector. (Fig. 2)
Power indicator
Indicate the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> before operating
the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status Projector status

Off The main power is switched off.
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed.
ff The setting of the projector is as follows.
Lit
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> or
the temperature indicator <TEMP> are blinking. (x page 208)
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed.
Red ff The setting of the projector is as follows.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].
ff The indicator will change to a red light when the specified time has elapsed after the
Blinking projector enters the standby mode if the projector is set as following.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK
STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> or
the temperature indicator <TEMP> are blinking. (x page 208)
Green Lit Projecting.
The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.
Orange Lit
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)
ENGLISH - 59
Note
ff While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on. Turn on the
power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red.
ff The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red). Refer to “Power
consumption” (x page 238) for the power consumption.
ff When the projector receives the signal from the remote control, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink in the following color
according to the status of the projector.
gg When the projector is in projection mode: Green
gg When the projector is in standby mode: Orange
However, if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the indicator will stay lit in red and will not blink if the
projector is in standby mode.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), or while the function
of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is operating and the light source is turned off.
Switching on the projector

When using the optional projection lens, attach the projection lens before switching on the projector.
Remove the lens cover first.
4)
4)
3) 2) 1)
1) Connect the power cord to the projector.
2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.
3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red, and the projector enters the standby mode.
4) Press the power on <b> button.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights green and the image is soon projected on the screen.
Note
ff A warm-up period of up to approximately five minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed when the projector is switched on at
around 0 °C (32 °F).
The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights red during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator
<TEMP> turns off and the projection starts. Refer to “When an indicator lights up” (x page 208) for the indicator status display.
ff If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than five minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has
occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. In such case, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C
(32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then turn on the power again.
ff It will take longer to start the projection when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] compared to the time
when it is set to [NORMAL].
ff Projection will start in approximately one second when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON] and if the
power is turned on within a specified time after going into the standby mode.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
ff When the power is turned on or an input signal is switched, you may hear a high-frequency driving sound. This is not a malfunction.
ff If the power was turned off at the previous use by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by using the breaker directly
while projecting, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights up green and an image is projected after a while when the power is
turned on by pressing the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by turning the breaker on with the power plug connected to the
outlet. This applies only when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY].
60 - ENGLISH
When the initial setting screen is displayed

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after
projection starts, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen
are displayed. When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL] is executed,
the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after projection starts. Set them according to the
circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the
previous screen.
Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.
Adjustment of the zoom and shift may also be necessary.
Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 74) for details.
1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (display language)

Select the language to show on the screen.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.
1) Press as to select the display language.
INITIAL SETTING 1/7
Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE.
SELECT
ENTER SET
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (operation setting)

Set the items regarding the operating method depending on the duration of use and the usage of the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. If you change the settings while using the projector, the estimated runtime may
shorten or the luminance may decrease.
This initial setting (operation setting) is prepared to complete the settings at once during the installation when the
operation of the projector is predetermined.
This cannot set all the items regarding the operation setting. When the detailed setting is required or setting
change is required, ask the person responsible for this projector (such as a person in charge of equipment or
operation).
ENGLISH - 61
INITIAL SETTING 2/7

OPERATING MODE NORMAL
LIGHT OUTPUT 100.0%
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP

CONSTANT MODE OFF
LINK GROUP A
CALIBRATION TIME OFF
CALIBRATION MESSAGE ON
Set the way to use the projector.
For details, please refer to the
operating instructions "When the
initial setting screen is displayed".
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
Note
ff For the relationship between the luminance and the runtime, refer to “Relationship between brightness and runtime” (x page 63).
ff For details on each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING].
1) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.

ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
ffSet [OPERATING MODE] to [NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] when using the projector at an
altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
[NORMAL] Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to increase the expected life of
[ECO]
the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low
[QUIET1]*3
noise is prioritized. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [QUIET1], but select this item when operating the projector
[QUIET2]*3
with less noise. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [ECO], but set this item to increase the expected life of the
[LONG LIFE1]
light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 43 000 hours*2.
The luminance will decrease compared to [LONG LIFE1], but set this item to increase the expected
[LONG LIFE2]
life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 61 000 hours*2.
[LONG LIFE3]
[USER1]
[USER2] [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually.
[USER3]
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
The value of runtime is just an estimate, and is not the warranty period.
*2 Estimated runtime is the time the initial brightness of the long life mode is basically maintained constant when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3].
*3 Only for PT-RZ990 / PT-RZ890
3) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
4) Press qw to adjust.
Adjustment
Operation Range of adjustment
Brightness Runtime (estimate)
Press w. The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q. The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
5) Press as to select [CONSTANT MODE].

[OFF] Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
62 - ENGLISH
Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.

[AUTO] When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is
automatically corrected.
Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring
[PC]
& Control Software”*1.
*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” can be downloaded from the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffProceed to Step 14) if the brightness control is not to be performed (when [OFF] is selected).
ffProceed to Step 9) when [PC] is selected.
7) Press as to select [LINK].

Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other
projectors.
[OFF]
The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT
OUTPUT] smaller.
[GROUP A]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization.
[GROUP B]
Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function.
[GROUP C]
Up to eight projectors can be registered and synchronized in one group.
[GROUP D]
9) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
10) Press the number (<0> - <9>) buttons on the remote control to enter the time.
ffThe projector will go into the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
ffPress qw to select “hour” or “minute”.
ffUse as to select [CALIBRATION TIME] (time is not flashing) and press the <DEFAULT> button if the time
is not to be specified.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
ff[CALIBRATION TIME] is set.
ffBrightness and color are measured at the specified time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate
during measurement.
12) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].

[ON] Displays message during calibration.

[OFF] Does not display message during calibration.
Relationship between brightness and runtime

The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by combining the settings of [LIGHT
OUTPUT] and [CONSTANT MODE].
The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make
the initial setting (operation setting) depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.
The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just
an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.
rrPT-RZ990
ffWhen [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0 9 400 20 000
70.2 6 600 27 000
39.4 3 700 34 000
24.5 2 300 37 000
ENGLISH - 63
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the [PICTURE]
menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 9 400
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0 2 300
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
ffWhen [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]

53.0 5 000 20 000
48.9 4 600 24 000
45.7 4 300 27 000
41.5 3 900 31 000
37.2 3 500 35 000
33.0 3 100 40 000
*1 Estimated runtime is the time the brightness is maintained constant when the projector is used with the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC
CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust. The brightness will gradually decrease after exceeding this time.
100.0 9 400
Brightness
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
5 000
50.0
40.0
3 100
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
Start of use Estimated runtime
Estimated runtime (hours) Image of brightness change over time
rrPT-RZ890
100.0 8 500 20 000
77.6 6 600 27 000
43.5 3 700 34 000
30.6 2 600 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 8 500
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0 2 600
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

58.8 5 000 20 000
55.3 4 700 24 000
51.8 4 400 27 000
47.1 4 000 31 000
43.5 3 700 35 000
38.8 3 300 40 000
64 - ENGLISH
100.0 8 500
Brightness
90.0
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0 5 000
50.0
40.0 3 300
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
rrPT-RZ790
100.0 7 000 20 000
70.0 4 900 27 000
35.7 2 500 34 000
21.4 1 500 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 7 000
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0 1 500
10.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

52.9 3 700 20 000
48.6 3 400 24 000
45.7 3 200 27 000
41.4 2 900 31 000
37.1 2 600 35 000
32.9 2 300 40 000
100.0 7 000
Brightness
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0 3 700
40.0
30.0 2 300
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
rrPT-RZ690
100.0 6 000 20 000
70.0 4 200 27 000
38.3 2 300 34 000
25.0 1 500 37 000
ENGLISH - 65
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 6 000
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
1 500
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

53.3 3 200 20 000
48.3 2 900 24 000
45.0 2 700 27 000
41.7 2 500 31 000
38.3 2 300 35 000
33.3 2 000 40 000
100.0 6 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
90.0 Brightness
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
3 200
50.0
40.0
2 000
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
Note
ff The runtime may be shorter than the estimation due to the influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation
environment, etc.
ff If the consolidated runtime of the projector exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. The
consolidated runtime can be confirmed in the [STATUS] screen. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] for details.
Initial setting (installation setting)

Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode.
Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 38) for details.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[PROJECTION METHOD].
1) Press qw to switch the setting.
INITIAL SETTING 3/7
PROJECTION METHOD
FRONT/REAR FRONT
FLOOR/CEILING AUTO
Change the projection method

(FRONT/REAR, FLOOR/CEILING)
if the screen display is upside down
or inverted.
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
66 - ENGLISH
Initial setting (standby mode)

Set the operation mode during standby. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use the
network function during standby. To keep power consumption low during standby, set this item to [ECO].
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY
MODE].
INITIAL SETTING 4/7
STANDBY MODE NORMAL
When set to ECO,

network functions and SERIAL OUT terminal,
and some RS-232C commands are not available
during standby.
CHANGE
ENTER SET
Initial setting (screen setting)

Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →
[SCREEN SETTING].
ffThe setting will change each time you press the button.
INITIAL SETTING 5/7
SCREEN FORMAT 16:10
SCREEN POSITION
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
2) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

ff[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].
INITIAL SETTING 5/7
SCREEN FORMAT 16:9
SCREEN POSITION 0
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET
ENGLISH - 67
Initial setting (time zone)

Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE
AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].
INITIAL SETTING 6/7
TIME ZONE +09:00
LOCAL DATE 20XX/01/01
LOCAL TIME 12 : 34 : 56
Please set up a time zone according to
the area of your country or region.
CHANGE
ENTER SET
Note
ff In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korea Standard Time). Change the setting of the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
Initial setting (date and time)

Set the local date and time.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE
AND TIME].
To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically” (x page 150).
1) Press as to select an item.
INITIAL SETTING 7/7
YEAR 20XX
MONTH 1
DAY 1
HOUR 12
MINUTE 34
SECOND 56
Please set the date and time

of the built-in clock of the projector.
MENU SELECT CHANGE

ENTER SET

ffConfirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
68 - ENGLISH
When the administrator account setting screen is displayed

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after
projection starts, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen are
displayed. When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL] is executed, the
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after projection starts.
To use the network function of this projector, set the user name and password of the administrator account. You
can also set it later from the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT
PASSWORD POLICY
USER NAME dispadmin
PASSWORD
PASSWORD CONFIRM
STORE
Please set the user name and password.

if not set,
could not use the Web Control function
and for communication control via a LAN
(including Panasonic application software).
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU
[PASSWORD POLICY]
Displays the policies about the password for the administrator account.
1) Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.
ffPressing the <MENU> button can return to the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen.
PASSWORD POLICY
Reusing passwords is not recommended.
Password cannot be blank.
A password consisting of at least eight

half-width characters and contaning
characters of at least three of the
following four types is recommended.
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Digits
Symbols(~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
MENU RETURN
Setting the administrator account

Set the user name and password of the administrator account.
1) Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
ffThe factory default setting of user name is "dispadmin".
2) Press asqw to select a character, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
3) After entering the user name, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 69

ffThe password cannot be blank.
6) After entering the password, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
7) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD CONFIRM] screen is displayed.
8) Enter the password entered in Step 5).
10) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For restrictions on character strings that can be set for password, refer to [PASSWORD POLICY] (x page 69) .
ff By pressing the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed, you can proceed to the next operation
without setting an administrator account password, but the network function of this projector cannot be used. To use the web control function
or the communication control (including operation with application software) via LAN, set a password.
ff If you press the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
screen will not be displayed the next time the power is turned on. To use the network function, set a password in the [NETWORK] menu →
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
ff The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed on the [Set up password] page (x page 197) of the web
control screen.
ff The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set on the [Set up password] page
(x page 197) of the web control screen.
70 - ENGLISH
Making adjustments and selections

It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern
displayed.
For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 162).
2) 3) 1) 6) 8) 9) 10)
1) 9) 6)
8) 10)
2) 3)
4)
4)
7)
5) 7)
1) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the projected image. (x page 74)
2) Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the
installation mode. (x page 38)
ffRefer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 83) for the operation of the menu screen.
3) Set [LENS TYPE].
ffConfirm the setting of the lens type when using the projector for the first time after attaching the projection
lens. (x page 76)
4) Press the input selection button (<RGB1> and <RGB2>, or <RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>,
<SDI>, <HDMI>) to select the input.
5) Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 49)
6) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the projected image.
7) If the input signal is the analog RGB signal or the DVI‑D/HDMI signal, press the <AUTO SETUP>
button.
8) Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the image size to match the screen.
9) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.
10) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom to match the projected image size to the screen.
Note
ff When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL
USER DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen are displayed. When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL] is
executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after projection starts.
Refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” (x page 61) and “When the administrator account setting screen is displayed”
(x page 69) for details.
ENGLISH - 71
Switching off the projector
3)
1)
4)
1)
2)
2)
1) Press the power standby <v> button.

ffThe [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.
(Or press the power standby <v> button again.)
ffProjection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body
lights orange. (The fan keeps running.)
3) Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector body lights/
blinks red.
4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Note
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on.
ff Even when the power standby <v> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main
power of the projector is on.
Usage of some functions is restricted but the power consumption during the standby mode is conserved when the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
ff While projecting, the power can be turned off by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch, or by directly using the breaker
under conditions where the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be switched off/on easily such as while installing on the ceiling.
However, the settings or adjustments performed right before the power is turned off may not be reflected.
72 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Projecting
Projecting
Check the external device connection (x page 52) and the power cord connection (x page 58) , and
turn on the power (x page 60) to start projection. Select the image to project, and adjust appearance of the
projected image.
Selecting the input signal
Remote control Control panel
The input of the image to project can be switched.

The input for projection can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the remote
control or the control panel.
1) Press the input selection button (<RGB1/2> or <RGB1> and <RGB2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>,
<SDI>, <HDMI>) on the remote control or the control panel.
Switches the input to RGB1 or RGB2.

Switches to the other input when one input has already been selected. The image of the signal input
<RGB1/2>
to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal is projected. Input selection can be fixed to
RGB1 or RGB2 using the [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
Switches the input to RGB1.
<RGB1> The image of the signal input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal (<R/PR>, <G/Y>, <B/PB>, <SYNC/HD>,
<VD>) is projected.
Switches the input to RGB2.
<RGB2>
The image of the signal input to the <RGB 2 IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
<DIGITAL LINK>
The image of the signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to DVI‑D.
<DVI-D>
The image of the signal input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to SDI.
<SDI>
The image of the signal input to the <SDI IN> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to HDMI.
<HDMI>
The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN> terminal is projected.
Attention
ff Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.
Set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR]. When the SDI signal is input, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN].
ff Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →
[ASPECT].
Note
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <DIGITAL LINK> button is pressed. The input
can also be changed using the RS‑232C control command.
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ENGLISH - 73
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift

Adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift if the image projected to the screen or its position is shifted even if the
projector and the screen are set up in the correct positions.
ffWhen the following projection lens is used, also refer to “Adjusting the focus balance” (x page 75).
ggZoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105)
ggFixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035)
Using the control panel
1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.

ffPressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
2) Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
Using the remote control
1) Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.
ffPressing the <FOCUS> button: Adjusts the focus (adjustment of the lens focus position).
ffPressing the <ZOOM> button: Adjusts the zoom (adjustment of the lens zoom position).
ffPressing the <SHIFT> button: Adjusts the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens).
2) Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
CAUTION
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in the opening around the lens.
Your hand may be caught in between, resulting to injury.
Note
ff The zoom adjustment screen is displayed but it will not operate when a projection lens with no zoom function is attached.
ff When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE055) is used, do not adjust the lens shift and use the projector with the lens position at the
home position. (x page 76)
ff The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw while adjusting the focus or zoom.
ff The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw for approximately three seconds or longer while adjusting the lens shift.
ff It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.
For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 162).
ff Only [FOCUS] is displayed in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the displayed characters are
unreadable due to incorrect focus. (Factory default)
The displayed color of [FOCUS] differs depending on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
COLOR].
ff When the projector is switched off during the lens shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the projector is
switched on. (x page 132)
ff When the main power is switched off during the lens shift adjustment, the lens calibration error screen is displayed during the next lens shift
adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION].
ff When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
74 - ENGLISH
Adjusting the focus balance

By changing the projected image size, the focus balance in the center and periphery of the image may be lost.
ffWhen the following projection lens is used, the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image
can be adjusted on the projection lens side.
ggZoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105)
ggFixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035)
rrZoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105)

ffThe illustrations in the steps are an example when attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE105).
1) Adjust the focus at the center of projected image.
ffFor the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 74).
2) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.
Periphery focus adjustment ring
3) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.
Note
ff The projected image size and scale shown on the periphery focus adjustment ring are an approximate guide.
ff Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] to [NORMAL] when using a projection lens other than the Zoom Lens (Model
No.: ET‑DLE020) and the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035).
rrAdjusting the focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used
After attaching the projection lens, adjust the focus with the projector correctly installed against the screen.
1) Move the projection lens to the home position.
ffFor details of operation method, refer to “Moving the projection lens to the home position” (x page 76).
2) Adjust the focus at the center of projected image.
ffFor the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 74).
3) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.
Periphery focus adjustment ring
4) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.
ENGLISH - 75
Note
ff The projected image size and scale shown on the periphery focus adjustment ring are an approximate guide.
ff Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] to [ET-DLE035] when using the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.:
ET‑DLE035).
Setting the lens type

If the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting. Change the setting if the type does not match
the projection lens attached to the projector.
1) Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
2) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LENS].

ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select [LENS TYPE].

Select this item when a projection lens anything other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020)
[NORMAL]
or the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used for projection.
[ET-DLE035] Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used for projection.
[ET-DLE020] Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020) is used for projection.
Moving the projection lens to the home position

Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.
When operating from the main menu

2) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

ffThe projection lens is moved to the home position.
Note
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] is set
incorrectly. Change the setting if the type does not match the projection lens attached to the projector.
ff The home position does not match with the optical image center position.
ff The home position varies depending on the projection lens type. Refer to “Lens shift range” (x page 77) for details.
ff The home position of the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) may deviate from the designed position.
76 - ENGLISH
When operating from the lens shift adjustment screen
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while displaying the lens shift adjustment screen.
Note
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] is set
incorrectly. Change the setting if the type does not match the projection lens attached to the projector.
ff You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the
remote control for at least three seconds.
Lens shift range

The projector can adjust the position of the projected image within the lens shift range for each projection lens
based on the position of the projected image in the home position (standard projection position).
Perform the lens shift adjustment within the range indicated in the following illustration. Note that moving the lens
outside the adjustment range may change the focus. This is because the shift of the lens is restricted to protect
the optical parts.
Following illustration indicates the lens shift range when the projector is installed on desk/floor.
Projection lens Standard zoom lens, ET‑DLE150, ET‑DLE170,

ET‑DLE060
Model No. ET‑DLE250, ET‑DLE350, ET‑DLE450
Standard projection position Standard projection position

0.3 H
0.19 H
0.1 H
Projected image height V

0.5 V
0.4 V
Lens shift range
0.16 V
0.1 H 0.1 H 0.16 V

Projected image width H Projected image width H
Origin position of the lens mounter Origin position of the lens mounter
Projection lens
ET‑DLE085, ET‑DLE105 ET‑DLE035
Model No.
Standard projection position
0.28 H
0.4 V

0.5 V
Lens shift range

0.16 V
0.88 V
0.1 H
Projected image width H Origin position of the lens mounter
Origin position of the lens mounter
ENGLISH - 77
Projection lens
ET‑DLE020
Model No.
Origin position of the lens mounter
0.08 V
0.5 V
Lens shift range
0.08 V
0.16 V
0.1 H
0.2 H 0.1 H
Projected image width H
Note
ff Use the projection lens in the standard projection position without adjusting the lens shift when the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.:
ET‑DLE055) is attached.
ff When the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is attached, the projector can be used with the shift adjustment based on the
projected image position in the standard lens position within the range that the edge of the projected image is not blocked by the projector.
78 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
Operating with the remote control
Using the shutter function

If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible to
turn off the image temporarily.
button
1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.

ffThe image disappears.
ffThis operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
ffThe image is displayed.
Note
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).
ff The fade-in/fade-out time of the image can be set by the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING].
ff The light source may be lit dimly due to warm up when the shutter function is used in the operating environment temperature of around 0 °C
(32 °F).
Using the on-screen display function

Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen display,
such as the menu or the input terminal name.
button
1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.

ffTurns off (hides) the on-screen display.
2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
ffCancels the hide condition of the on-screen display.
Note
ff The hide condition of the on-screen display can also be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three
seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden).
ENGLISH - 79
Using the automatic setup function

The image position when the DVI‑D/HDMI signal is input, or the resolution, clock phase, and image position when
the analog RGB signal is input can be adjusted automatically. (Analog RGB signal is a signal structured with dots
just like the computer signal.)
It is recommended to input an image with bright white borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white
characters when the automatic adjustment is being performed.
Avoid using images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.
button
1) Press the <AUTO SETUP> button.

ff[COMPLETE] is displayed when it has completed without any problem.
ffThis operation can be also performed by pressing the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel.
Note
ff The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident. In such a case, adjust the [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE]
(x page 99).
ff If an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input, [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment may not be performed properly even
when [COMPLETE] appears. In such a case, adjust the following settings.
gg [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [INPUT RESOLUTION] (x page 106)
gg [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE] (x page 99)
gg [POSITION] menu → [SHIFT] (x page 97)
ff Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [AUTO SETUP] (x page 113).
ff Automatic adjustment may not be possible depending on the computer model.
ff Automatic adjustment may not be possible for the synchronization signal for composite sync or SYNC ON GREEN.
ff Image may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
ff Adjustment is required for each input signal.
ff Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic adjustment operation.
ff Even if a signal possible to perform the automatic setup is being input, it may not be able to adjust correctly if the automatic setup function
is used while the moving image is being input. [INCOMPLETE] may be displayed, or the adjustment may not be completed correctly even if
[COMPLETE] is displayed.
Using the function button

By assigning the following functions to the <FUNCTION> button, it can be used as a simplified shortcut button.
[SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR],
[ASPECT], [PROJECTION METHOD]
button
1) Press the <FUNCTION> button.
Note
ff Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 156).
Displaying internal test pattern

The projector has nine types of internal test patterns to check the condition of the projector. To display test
patterns, perform the following steps.
button
1) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
2) Press qw to select the test pattern.
Note
ff Test patterns can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 162) for details.
ff Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing
various adjustments.
80 - ENGLISH
Using the status function

Display the status of the projector.
button
1) Press the <STATUS> button.

ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
STATUS 1/5
PROJECTOR TYPE PT-RZ990
SERIAL NUMBER 123456789012
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 10000h
LIGHT RUNTIME 10000h / 10000h
CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME 1h 23m

MAIN/SUB VERSION 1.00 / 1.00
INTAKE AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
OPTICS MODULE TEMP. 27°C/80°F
EXHAUST AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
LIGHT1 TEMP. 31°C/87°F
SELF TEST NO ERRORS
ENTER SEND E-MAIL

CHANGE MENU EXIT
Note
ff The projector status can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] (x page 156)
for details.
Setting ID number of the remote control

When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.
The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, keep
pressing the <ID SET> button on the remote control for at least three seconds to set the ID number of
the remote control to [ALL]. In addition, when the ID number of the projector is unknown, setting the ID
number to [ALL] enables the remote control.
button
1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
2) Within five seconds, press the two-digit ID number set on the projector using the number (<0> - <9>)
buttons.
ffWhen the ID number is set to [ALL], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the
projector.
Attention
ff Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control
carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to
its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
ff The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Note
ff When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector
body, as same as when [ALL] is set.
ff Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
ENGLISH - 81
Chapter 4 Settings
This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.
82 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — Menu navigation
Menu navigation
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Navigating through the menu
Operating procedure
button
1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU
2) Press as to select an item from the main menu.

ffThe selected item is highlighted in yellow.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU

ffThe sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT DEFAULT
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE 0
GEOMETRY OFF
MENU SELECT
ENTER SUB MENU
ENGLISH - 83
4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
ffSome items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A B C
ffFor some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
CONTRAST 0
ADJUST
Note
ff Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
ff Some items or functions may not be adjusted or used for certain signals to be input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or
used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.
If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.
ff Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
ff Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.
ff For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 84) and “Sub-menu” (x page 85).
ff The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD COLOR]. The selected item
is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
ROTATION].
Resetting adjustment values to the factory default

If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to
the factory default settings.
button
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

CONTRAST 0
ADJUST
Note
ff You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
ff To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu items to the factory default at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE].
ff Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those
items individually.
ff The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular
mark varies according to the selected input signals.
Current adjustment value
Factory default setting
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD)
when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].
Main menu item [SIMPLE] mode Page
[PICTURE] l 88
[POSITION] l 97
[ADVANCED MENU] ― 105
84 - ENGLISH
Main menu item [SIMPLE] mode Page
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] l 110
[DISPLAY OPTION] l 111
[PROJECTOR SETUP] l 131
[TEST PATTERN] l 162
[SIGNAL LIST] l 163
[SECURITY] ― 166
[NETWORK] l 170
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.
The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD)
when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page

[PICTURE MODE] [GRAPHIC] *1
l 88
[CONTRAST] [0] l 88
[BRIGHTNESS] [0] l 88
[COLOR] [0]*2 l 89
[TINT] [0] ― 89
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT] *2
― 89
[WHITE GAIN] [+10] ― 91
[GAMMA] [DEFAULT] ― 91
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [OFF]*2 ― 92
[SHARPNESS] [+6]*2 ― 92
[NOISE REDUCTION] [OFF] *2
― 93
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] [2]*2 ― 93
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [YPBPR] *1
― 94
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] [AUTO] ― 95
*1 Depends on the signal input.

*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].
[POSITION]

[SHIFT] ― ― 97
[ASPECT] [DEFAULT] *1
l 97
[ZOOM] ― ― 98
[CLOCK PHASE] [0]*1
― 99
[GEOMETRY] [OFF] l 99
[ADVANCED MENU]

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]*1 ― 105
ENGLISH - 85

[BLANKING] ― ― 105
[INPUT RESOLUTION] ― ― 106
[CLAMP POSITION] [24]*1 ― 106
[EDGE BLENDING] [OFF] ― 106
[FRAME RESPONSE] [NORMAL] ― 108
[RASTER POSITION] ― ― 109
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (x page 110)
[DISPLAY OPTION]

[COLOR MATCHING] [OFF] l 111
[COLOR CORRECTION] [OFF] ― 112
[SCREEN SETTING] ― l 112
[AUTO SIGNAL] [OFF] ― 113
[AUTO SETUP] ― ― 113
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] ― ― 114
[RGB IN] ― ― 116
[DVI-D IN] ― ― 117
[HDMI IN] ― ― 119
[DIGITAL LINK IN] ― ― 120
[SDI IN] ― ― 122
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] ― l 123
[MENU MODE] [NORMAL] l 125
[IMAGE ROTATION] [OFF] ― 125
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] ― 126
[STARTUP LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO] l 126
[UNIFORMITY] ― ― 126
[SHUTTER SETTING] ― ― 127
[FREEZE] ― ― 129
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] [OFF] ― 129
[CUT OFF] ― ― 130
[PROJECTOR SETUP]

[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] l 131
[PROJECTION METHOD] ― l 131
[LENS] ― l 132
[OPERATION SETTING] ― l 133
[LIGHT OUTPUT] [100.0%] l 140
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] ― ― 140
[STANDBY MODE] [NORMAL] ― 144
[QUICK STARTUP] [OFF] ― 144
[NO SIGNAL SETTING] ― ― 145
[INITIAL STARTUP] [LAST MEMORY] ― 149
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] [LAST USED] ― 149
[DATE AND TIME] ― l 149
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] ― 150
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] ― ― 152
86 - ENGLISH

[RS-232C] ― l 154
[REMOTE2 MODE] [DEFAULT] ― 156
[FUNCTION BUTTON] ― ― 156
[STATUS] ― l 156
[DATA CLONING] ― ― 158
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] ― ― 160
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] ― ― 160
[INITIALIZE] ― l 160
[SERVICE PASSWORD] ― l 161
[TEST PATTERN]
[SIGNAL LIST]
[SECURITY]

[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] ― 166
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] ― ― 166
[DISPLAY SETTING] [OFF] ― 166
[TEXT CHANGE] ― ― 167
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] ― ― 167
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] ― ― 168
[NETWORK]

[ETHERNET TYPE] [LAN] l 170
[DIGITAL LINK] ― l 170
[WIRED LAN] ― l 172
[PROJECTOR NAME] ― l 172
[NETWORK STATUS] ― l 173
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] ― l 173
[NETWORK SECURITY] ― l 175
[NETWORK CONTROL] ― l 176
[PJLink] ― l 176
[Art-Net] ― ― 178
Note
ff Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or
set.
ff Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
ENGLISH - 87
Chapter 4 Settings — [PICTURE] menu
[PICTURE] menu
On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 83) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the
projector is used.
1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press qw.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.

[CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
[NATURAL] The image becomes suitable for using in a relatively dark environment.
The image becomes Rec.709 compliant when the setting other than [PICTURE MODE] is set to the
[REC709]
factory default.
[DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[DYNAMIC] The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC] The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer.
Note
ff Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709” and is a color standard of high-vision broadcasting.
ff DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and display images should not be used for medical purposes such as diagnosis.
ff If the <ENTER> button is pressed while [PICTURE MODE] is selected, the adjustment condition that is currently set can be saved as a
specified value of the selected picture mode. The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] in the
[PICTURE] menu are saved.
ff If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is set to [AUTO], [GRAPHIC] is automatically selected when a new still image
signal is input and [STANDARD] is automatically selected when a new moving image signal is input. If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT
PICTURE MODE] is set to anything other than [AUTO], the picture mode set in [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is selected when a new signal
is input.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

Press w. The screen becomes brighter.
-31 - +31
Press q. The screen becomes darker.
Attention
ff Adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].

ffThe [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
88 - ENGLISH

Press w. Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
-31 - +31
Press q. Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [COLOR].

ffThe [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Deepens colors.
-31 - +31
Press q. Weakens colors.
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1) Press as to select [TINT].

ffThe [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.
-31 - +31
Press q. Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
Adjusting with color temperature
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.

[USER1] Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 90) for
[USER2] details.
Sets the value in increments of 100 K.
[3200K] - [9300K]
Select an item so that images become natural.
Note
ff [DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.].
ff This item is fixed to [USER1] when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] is set to anything other than [OFF].
ff The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.
ENGLISH - 89
Adjusting desired white balance

3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].

ffThe [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].

ffThe [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

Press w. Deepens red.
[RED]
Press q. Weakens red.
Press w. Deepens green. [WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is
[GREEN] +255)
Press q. Weakens green. [WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 - +127 (factory default is 0)
Press w. Deepens blue.
[BLUE]
Press q. Weakens blue.
Note
ff Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
Adjusting to desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings

3) Press qw to select anything other than [DEFAULT], [USER1], or [USER2].

ffThe [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2].
ffThe status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.
ffThe [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.
ffThe data is not overwritten when [CANCEL] is selected with qw and the <ENTER> button is pressed.
ffThe [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.
90 - ENGLISH
Note
ff Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
ff When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.
Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]

3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].

ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
ff The display of [USER1] or [USER2] is also changed when the name is changed.
[WHITE GAIN]
Adjust the brightness of the white part of the image.
1) Press as to select [WHITE GAIN].

ffThe [WHITE GAIN] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Brightness of the white part gets stronger.
0 - +10
Press q. The image becomes more natural.
[GAMMA]
You can switch gamma mode.
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

ffThe [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.

Uses the gamma data registered by the user.
[USER]
(Registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
[1.8]
[2.0] Set so that images become as you like.
[2.2]
ENGLISH - 91
Changing the [USER] name
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

ffThe [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER].

ffThe [GAMMA] screen is displayed.
ffThe [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

ffThe gamma selection name is changed.
Note
ff Display of [USER] is also changed when the name is changed.
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].

ffThe [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] - [6] Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].

ffThe [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

Press w. Contours become sharper.
0 - +15
Press q. Contours become softer.
Note
ff If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+15].
92 - ENGLISH
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].

ffThe [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly corrects the noise.
[2] Moderately corrects the noise.
[3] Strongly corrects the noise.
Attention
ff When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from the original image. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image
to make the contrast optimum for the image.
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[OFF] Disables the dynamic contrast function.

[1] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
[3] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
Set any desired correction.
[USER]
Refer to “Performing desired correction” (x page 93) for details.
Performing desired correction
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER].

ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the item to set.
ffThe items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw.
ffPress the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.
Setting item Details

[OFF] Does not adjust the light source.
[AUTO CONTRAST]
(Automatic light source The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light
adjustment) [1] - [255] source.
Can be set in increments of 1.
ENGLISH - 93
Setting item Details

[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL] Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the video signal
(Setting of the brightness being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the value, the
[6%] - [50%]
level of the signal to start the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the light source.
light adjustment) Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 30 %)
[DISABLE] Does not turn off the light source.
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER] Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the video
(Time setting until the light signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT
turns off) [0.0s] - [10.0s] SIGNAL LEVEL].
Select an item from [0.0s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s].
[0.0s] - [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
Sets the level of the brightness of the video signal to turn off the
(Setting of the brightness
[0%] - [5%] light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
level of the signal to turn off
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %)
the light)
Does not set the fade-in of the image when the light source is turned
[OFF] on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN]
(Setting of fade-in when Sets the time to fade in the image when the light source is turned
lighting up again) on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with
[0.5s] - [10.0s] [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -
[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
Does not set the fade-out of the image when the light source is
[OFF]
turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT]
(Setting of fade-out when Sets the time to fade out the image when the light source is turned
lighting off) off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -
[MANUAL INTENSITY]
The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
(Manual light source [0] - [255]
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)
adjustment)
[OFF] Does not compensate the signal.
[DYNAMIC GAMMA] [1] Slightly compensates the signal.
(Adjustment of signal
compensation) [2] Moderately compensates the signal.
[3] Strongly compensates the signal.
Sets the contrast synchronization function.
This setting item is common with the following menu item.
ff The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
SYNC]
Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC] (x page 152) for details.
Note
ff [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
ff When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again
from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the brightness level of the video signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
gg When the input signal is gone
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
gg When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
ff When the image of analog signal is projected, the image may be affected by the signal noise while the brightness level of the video signal is
detected. In such case, it is determined that the signal has not fallen below even when the brightness level of the image falls below the value
set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL].
ff The contrast will be maximized when [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set to [3].
ff The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not
operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
ff The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of
the video signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an
unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
94 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select a system format.

ffAvailable system formats vary depending on the input signal.
Terminal System format

480/60i, 576/50i, or 576/50p
Select [RGB] or [YCBCR].
signal
<RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2
Select an item from [640x480/60], [480/60p YCBCR], or [480/60p
IN> terminal 640 x 480/60 or 480/60p signal
RGB].
Other moving image signals Select [RGB] or [YPBPR].
480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, or
Select [RGB] or [YCBCR].
<DVI-D IN> terminal 576/50p signal
Other moving image signals Select [RGB] or [YPBPR].
480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, or
<HDMI IN> terminal, <DIGITAL Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YCBCR].
576/50p signal
LINK/LAN> terminal
Other moving image signals Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR].
Note
ff For details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 231).
ff This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
ff For the SDI input, the signal format can be set in detail in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN].
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]

Set the picture mode to be applied when a new signal is input. The setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE
MODE] will switch according to the setting.
1) Press as to select [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC] when a still image signal is input or [STANDARD] when a
[AUTO]
moving image signal is input.
[STANDARD] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [STANDARD].
[CINEMA] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [CINEMA].
[NATURAL] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [NATURAL].
[REC709] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [REC709].
[DICOM SIM.] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DICOM SIM.].
[DYNAMIC] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DYNAMIC].
[GRAPHIC] Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC].
Note
ff The following are the conditions where the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is switched to the picture mode set in
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].
gg When a new signal is input
gg When the deleted signal is input again after the registered signal has been deleted
gg When the <DEFAULT> button is pressed while the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is selected
gg When there is no input signal
sRGB-compliant video
sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966‑2‑1) for color reproduction defined by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission).
Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.
1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF].
ffRefer to [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 111).
2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.
ffRefer to “[PICTURE] menu” (x page 88).
ENGLISH - 95
3) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
4) Press qw to set [REC709].
5) Press as to select [COLOR].
6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.
7) Follow Steps 5) - 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [WHITE GAIN], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW] to the factory default settings.
Note
ff sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.
96 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [POSITION] menu
[POSITION] menu
On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Note
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, adjust the shift, aspect, and clock phase from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device at first.
[SHIFT]
Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even
when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.
1) Press as to select [SHIFT].

ffThe [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Orientation Operation Adjustment
Press a. The image position moves up.
Vertical (up and down)

adjustment
Press s. The image position moves down.
Press w. The image position moves to the right.
Horizontal (right and left)

adjustment
Press q. The image position moves to the left.
Note
ff For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved
vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN
SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first. (x page 112)
1) Press as to select [ASPECT].

ffThe [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
[DEFAULT] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
ENGLISH - 97
The projector identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by
[AUTO]*1 automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480/60i
and 480/60p signals.
[THROUGH] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input*2. When
[16:9]
wide-screen signals are input*3, the images are displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input*2. When wide-
[4:3] screen signals are input*3, the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio
so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen.
Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
[H FIT] signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN
FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.
Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
[V FIT] signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.
Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of
[HV FIT] the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio
converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
*1 During RGB signal (480/60i, 480/60p) input only

*2 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*3 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
ff Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals.
[DEFAULT] cannot be selected for an analog RGB signal (480/60i, 480/60p).
[THROUGH] cannot be selected for a 4K video signal (resolution of 3 840 x 2 160 or 4 096 x 2 160).
ff If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.
Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
ff If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original
copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio
adjustment and zoom function.
ff If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not
be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the
creator of the images.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the image size.
The adjustments in [ZOOM] will differ depending on the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].
When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].

ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
[ON]
same magnification.
5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
98 - ENGLISH
When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].

ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
[INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
[ON]
same magnification.
7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to anything other than [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.
[CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].

ffThe [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
ffAdjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust the image so that the amount of interference is
at a minimum.
Note
ff Adjustment may not be possible depending on the signal.
ff There may be no optimal value if the output from the input computer is unstable.
ff There may be no optimal value when the total dot number is shifted.
ff [CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when YCBCR/YPBPR signal or RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN>
terminal.
ff [CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.
ff The adjustment value will change to [0] when w is pressed while it was at [+31]. Also, the adjustment value will change to [+31] when q is
pressed while it was at [0].
[GEOMETRY]
You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.
Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.
The projected image can be made to look more natural by making topical correction as necessary.
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

[OFF] Does not perform geometric adjustment.

[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
ENGLISH - 99
[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED CORRECTION] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
[PC-1]
Select this item when performing correction using a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management
[PC-2]
Software”*1. Up to three correction data can be saved.
[PC-3]
*1 “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/). It is necessary
to register and login to PASS to download.
Note
ff The menu, logo, or waveform monitor display may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.
ff The edge blending adjustment may not be performed correctly depending on the environment when using the [ADVANCED MENU] menu →
[EDGE BLENDING] and [GEOMETRY] simultaneously.
ff The optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) can be used to expand the correctable range. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
ff The image may disappear for a moment or may be disrupted while performing adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION]
2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].

ffThe [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust.
[KEYSTONE]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal
direction. direction.
[FREE GRID]
Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.
For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” (x page 102).
100 - ENGLISH
[CURVED CORRECTION]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]

Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
[FREE GRID]
Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]
2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].

ffThe [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffWhen [LINEARITY] is selected, press qw to select either adjustment method ([AUTO] or [MANUAL]).
Select [AUTO] normally.
For details of operation when [MANUAL] is selected, refer to “Adjusting to desired linearity” (x page 102).
5) Press asqw to adjust.
[CORNER CORRECTION]
[UPPER LEFT] [UPPER RIGHT] [LOWER LEFT] [LOWER RIGHT]
[LINEARITY]
Horizontal direction Vertical direction
ENGLISH - 101
[CORNER CORRECTION]
[FREE GRID]
Adjusting to desired linearity
2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].

ffThe [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LINEARITY].
5) Press qw to select [MANUAL].

ffThe [LINEARITY] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to adjust.
Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]
2) Press qw to select an item other than [OFF].

ffThe screen for the selected item is displayed.
4) Press as to select [FREE GRID].
5) Press qw to select an item.

[OFF] Disables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].

[ON] Enables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].
ffProceed to Step 6) when [ON] is selected.

ffThe [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [GRID RESOLUTION].

Performs the adjustment using the pattern of the outer border (there are two lines each vertically and
[2x2]
horizontally as a grid line).
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into two in the horizontal direction and also in
[3x3]
the vertical direction.
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into four in the horizontal direction and also in
[5x5] the vertical direction.
(Factory default setting)
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into eight in the horizontal direction and also in
[9x9]
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into 16 in the horizontal direction and also in
[17x17]
9) Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS].
102 - ENGLISH

[POINT] Select this item when adjusting by selecting one intersection from the intersections on the grid lines.
Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one horizontal grid line, and adjusting them
[HORIZONTAL LINE]
simultaneously.
Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one vertical grid line, and adjusting them
[VERTICAL LINE]
simultaneously.
11) Press as to select [GRID WIDTH].

Select the width of the grid line. It can be set between 1 line to 10 lines.
[1] - [10]
(Factory default setting: [3])
13) Press as to select [GRID COLOR].

[WHITE]
[BLACK]
[RED]
[GREEN] Displays the pattern of the selected color.
[BLUE] (Factory default setting: [RED])
[CYAN]
[MAGENTA]
[YELLOW]
[OFF] Does not display the pattern.
15) Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].

[WHITE]
[BLACK]
[RED]
Select the color of the marker that indicates the control point.
[GREEN] The marker that indicates the control point is displayed in the control point selection mode and
[BLUE] adjustment mode.
(Factory default setting: [WHITE])
[CYAN]
[MAGENTA]
[YELLOW]
17) Press as to select [EXECUTE].

ffThe screen switches to the control point selection mode.
19) Press asqw to select the control point.
ffMove the marker over the intersection of the grid lines to adjust.
ffWhen [HORIZONTAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press as to select the control point.
ffWhen [VERTICAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press qw to select the control point.
ffThe control point is confirmed, and the screen switches to the adjustment mode.
21) Press asqw to adjust the position of the control point.
ffBy adjusting the position of the control point, the range to the neighboring intersections will be corrected.
ENGLISH - 103
ffTo continuously adjust the position of the other intersection, press the <MENU> button or the <ENTER>
button to return to Step 19).
ffPressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID
WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].
Note
ff The contents adjusted in [FREE GRID] are saved as individual correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED
CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3].
ff Even if [GRID RESOLUTION] or [CONTROL POINTS] is reselected, the correction data adjusted before the reselection is maintained.
ff By selecting more narrow grid pattern with [GRID RESOLUTION], the range of effect of the control point position adjustment will be smaller.
To perform topical fine adjustment, it is recommended to adjust by setting [GRID RESOLUTION] to [17x17].
ff The image may not be displayed correctly if adjustment of the control point position increases.
ff The settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are
synchronized with the setting items under each item of [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2],
and [PC-3].
Initializing adjustments for [FREE GRID]

Initialize the correction data adjusted with [FREE GRID] and restore the factory default settings (the state where
no correction is performed). Simultaneously the settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID
WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are restored to the factory default settings.
2) Press qw to select the item to initialize its correction data in [FREE GRID].

ffThe screen for the selected item is displayed.
4) Press as to select [FREE GRID].
5) Press qw to select [ON].

ffThe [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

Note
ff Each correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3] cannot be
initialized at once.
To initialize all the correction data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, all the correction data for [FREE GRID] is
initialized.
104 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
[ADVANCED MENU] menu

On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

The picture quality is enhanced by raising the vertical resolution higher performing the cinema processing when
interlace signal for moving image is input.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].

[AUTO] Automatically detects the signal and performs the cinema processing. (Factory default setting)
[OFF] Does not perform cinema processing.
When 60 Hz vertical scanning
[30p FIXED]
frequency signals are input
Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
When 50 Hz vertical scanning
[25p FIXED]
frequency signals are input
Note
ff In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p
FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
ff When the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
[BLANKING]
You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out
from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected.
1) Press as to select [BLANKING].

ffThe [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].
ffThe blanking width can be adjusted to arbitrary shape using a computer when [CUSTOM MASKING] is set
to anything other than [OFF] ([PC-1], [PC-2], or [PC-3]). Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the
computer can be saved.
To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) is required. To
purchase the product, consult your dealer.
4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

The blanking zone
Press q.
moves upward.
Top of the screen [UPPER]

The blanking zone
Press w.
moves downward.
Top and bottom 0 - 1 198

The blanking zone
Press w.
moves upward.
Bottom of the screen [LOWER]

The blanking zone
Press q.
moves downward.
ENGLISH - 105
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

The blanking zone
Press w.
moves to the right.
Left side of the
[LEFT]
screen The blanking zone
Press q.
moves to the left.
Left and right 0 - 1 918

The blanking zone
Press q.
moves to the right.
Right side of the
[RIGHT]
screen The blanking zone
Press w.
moves to the left.
Note
ff The upper limit of the adjustment range may be restricted so that the entire projected image is not covered by blanking width.
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
You can adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].

ffThe [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press
qw to adjust each item.
ffValues corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or
decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point while viewing the screen if there are vertical
stripes or sections are missing from the screen.
Note
ff Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.
ff Image may be disrupted during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
ff [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2
IN> terminal.
[CLAMP POSITION]
You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green.
1) Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].
Status Rough guide for optimal value Range of adjustment

The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is
The black part is blunt.
the optimal value.
1 - 255
The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness
The black part is green.
has improved is the optimal value.
Note
ff [CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
[EDGE BLENDING]
The edge blending function allows multiple images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the inclination of the
brightness at the overlapped area.
1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
106 - ENGLISH

[OFF] Sets the edge blending function to off.

[ON] Use the setting value preset in the projector for the inclination of the edge blending area.
Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Configuration/registration
[USER]
requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
ffProceed to Step 3) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

ffThe [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to specify the location to be corrected.
ffWhen joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]
5) Press qw to switch to [ON].
6) Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].
7) Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.
8) Press as to select [MARKER].
9) Press qw to switch to [ON].

ffA marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for
the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors
to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different correction
widths.
The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.
Green line
Red line
10) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST].

ffThe [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen is displayed.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen, the black test pattern is
displayed when you enter the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
12) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

ffThe [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
ff[RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
14) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
ffOnce the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST]
screen.
15) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in [BLACK BORDER WIDTH].
ENGLISH - 107
16) Press qw to set the region (width) of the [BLACK BORDER WIDTH] adjustment.
17) Press as to select [UPPER KEYSTONE AREA], [LOWER KEYSTONE AREA], [LEFT KEYSTONE
AREA], or [RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA].
18) Press qw to adjust the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK
BORDER LEVEL].
19) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].

ffThe [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] screen is displayed.
ffOnce the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST]
screen.
22) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] for [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

ffThe [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
[BLACK BORDER WIDTH] (Right)
Projection range Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)
[MARKER] (Red)
Edge blending [START] (Right)

([MARKER] (Green))
[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)

[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] [BLACK BORDER LEVEL]
Note
ff [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difficult to notice
when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to structure a multi-display screen. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED
BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the
part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL], adjust
the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker.
ff The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.
ff When structuring a multi-display screen using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] first before
making adjustments in Step 12). Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
ff If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.
ff The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] →
[AUTO TESTPATTERN].
ff Adjustment of the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to perform
edge blending together with the adjustment of [GEOMETRY] (x page 99). Perform the edge blending adjustment matching the shape in
[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] following Steps 17) and 18) when [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is tilted due to correcting the
keystone with the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] → [KEYSTONE].
[FRAME RESPONSE]
Set image frame delay.
1) Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].

[NORMAL] Standard setting.

[FAST]*1 Simplifies the image processing to reduce image frame delay.
108 - ENGLISH
[FIXED]*2 Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification.
*1 [FAST] cannot be set when input signal is not interlaced signal.

*2 Only when moving image signal or still image signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is input
Note
ff When [FAST] is set, the picture quality deteriorates. The [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not
using the whole display area.
1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].

ffThe [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
ENGLISH - 109
Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-menu.
Changing the display language

You can select the language of the on-screen display.
1) Press as to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SELECT
ENTER SET
ffVarious menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected language.
ffThe language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese,
Russian, or Korean.
Note
ff The on-screen display language is set to English in the factory default setting as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
110 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[COLOR MATCHING]
Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.
Adjusting the color matching as desired
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].

[OFF] Color matching adjustment is not carried out.

[3COLORS] Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
[7COLORS] Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
[MEASURED] Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” (x page 111) for details about this mode.
3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], or [WHITE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],
[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] when [7COLORS] is selected).

ffThe [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], [3COLORS:BLUE], or [3COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
When [7COLORS] is selected, the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE],
[7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA], [7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
ffOnly [GAIN] can be adjusted when [WHITE] is selected for [3COLORS].
ffThe adjustment value will change between 0*1 and 2 048.
*1 The lower limit varies depending on the color to be adjusted.
Note
ff Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
ff Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector
or by a service person.
ff When the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the selected adjustment item will return to the factory default value for the
current picture mode.
ff When this item is set to anything other than [OFF], the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR CORRECTION] is fixed to [OFF], and the
[PICTURE] menu → [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].
Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter

Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED], [GREEN],
[BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to select [MEASURED].
ENGLISH - 111

ffThe [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [MEASURED DATA].

ffThe [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.
6) Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.
7) Press as to select a color, and press qw to adjust the setting.

ffSet [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.
8) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [TARGET DATA].

ffThe [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.
11) Press as to select a color and press qw to input coordinates for desired colors.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
12) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
Note
ff Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.
ff Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.
ff The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [EDGE BLENDING] →
[ON]/[USER] → [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
ff When using a colorimeter or similar instrument to take measurement, measure the colors displayed in [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
ff It is recommended to enter the value between [1000] and [32768] in [Y(RELATIVE)] of [WHITE] in the [MEASURED DATA] screen. For each
value ([Y(RELATIVE)] of [BLACK], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE]), enter the relative value for the [Y(RELATIVE)] value of [WHITE] based on
the luminance (Y) of each color measured using the colorimeter.
ff A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement value obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instrument
and measurement environment used.
[COLOR CORRECTION]
Colors can be adjusted and registered for each input signal format.
1) Press as to select [COLOR CORRECTION].

[OFF] Standard setting.

For each signal format of RGB signal and YCBCR/YPBPR signal, six colors of red, green, blue, cyan,
[USER] magenta, and yellow can be adjusted and registered. Press the <ENTER> button and set the details.
Adjustment is possible within the range of -31 to +31.
[SCREEN SETTING]
Set the screen size.
Correct to the optimum image position for the set screen when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed.
1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].

ffThe [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
112 - ENGLISH
[SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected

[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
[4:3] Adjusts the horizontal position between ‑160 and 160.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between ‑60 and 60.
4) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

ff[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].
5) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].
[AUTO SIGNAL]
Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically.
The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP>
button on the remote control on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings, etc.
1) Press as to select [AUTO SIGNAL].

[OFF] Sets the auto signal function to off.

Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during
[ON]
projection.
[AUTO SETUP]
Set this when adjusting a special signal or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.
Setting with [MODE]
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].

ffThe [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.

[DEFAULT] Standard setting.

Select this item when an image aspect ratio is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the
[WIDE]
[DEFAULT] setting.
[USER] Select this when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution (number of display dots).
ffProceed to Step 7) when [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] is selected.

ffProceed to Step 5) when [USER] is selected.
5) Press as to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press qw to match [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal
resolution of the signal source.

ffAutomatic adjustment is executed. [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment. When
completed, the screen returns to the [AUTO SETUP] screen.
Note
ff Automatic setup of signal can be executed when analog RGB signal consisting of dots such as computer signal, or DVI‑D/HDMI signal is
being input.
ENGLISH - 113
Adjusting position automatically

3) Press as to select [POSITION ADJUST].
[ON] Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
Adjusting signal level automatically

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST].
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.

Adjusts black level (the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (the [PICTURE] menu
[ON]
→ [CONTRAST]) when automatic setup is executed.
Note
ff [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] may not function properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input
signal is disrupted.
Using the SDI input and HDMI input or DVI‑D input
1) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].

ffThe [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].

ffThe [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.
Primary input Secondary input Details

[OFF] Disables the backup function.
[DVI-D] [HDMI]
[SDI] [DVI-D] Enables the backup function.
[SDI] [HDMI]

7) Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].
ff[AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF].
114 - ENGLISH

Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input
[ENABLE]
(secondary input) is disrupted.
[DISABLE] Disables the automatic input switching function.
Note
ff The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
ff The backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and same signal is input to the primary
input and the secondary input.
ff To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to a combination of the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input.
gg Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.
gg Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.
ff If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to
use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or
secondary input.
ff When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the combination of that input is displayed in [PRIMARY INPUT] and
[SECONDARY INPUT] of the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen.
ff [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide (x page 125) and the [STATUS] screen (x pages 81, 156) when [BACKUP
INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When the signal can be switched to the backup input signal using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].
When it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.
The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary input
is displayed.
The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary input
is displayed.
ff When the combination of the input for [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input, the input
switches seamlessly if the input is switched between the primary input and the secondary input while the signal of the backup input can be
switched.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] shows [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the backup
input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], the indication in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] will change to [INACTIVE] if the input
signal is disrupted and automatically switches to the backup input. In this case, it is not possible to switch to the backup input signal until the
original input signal is restored. If the input has switched to the backup input automatically, it is possible to switch to the backup input signal
when the original signal has been restored. In this case, the current input is maintained.
ff The primary input setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA],
and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
ff When the combination of inputs in [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input, the backup
function is enabled only in the following combination of signals.
Primary input Secondary input

[SDI] [DVI-D]/[HDMI]
HD‑SDI 720/60p YPBPR 4:2:2 720/60p YPBPR 4:4:4
3G‑SDI 1080/60i RGB 1080/60i RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/50i RGB 1080/50i RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/24p RGB 1080/24p RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/25p RGB 1080/25p RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/30p RGB 1080/30p RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/60p YPBPR 4:2:2 1080/60p YPBPR 4:4:4
Using the DVI‑D input and HDMI input

ENGLISH - 115

5) Press as to select the combination of the DVI‑D input and HDMI input and press the <ENTER>
button.

[ENABLE] Switches to the secondary input automatically when the input signal for primary input is disrupted.
Note
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to a combination of the DVI‑D input and HDMI input.
gg Display the image of the primary input.
ff In the following cases, the state of readiness is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, switch to the
primary input and enter the state of readiness.
gg When switching to an input other than the primary input from the state of readiness
gg When switching to the secondary input while the backup function is active
[RGB IN]
Set the <RGB 1 IN> terminal and the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
Switching the slice level of an input synchronization signal
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].

ffThe [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL].
[LOW] Set the slice level to [LOW].

[HIGH] Set the slice level to [HIGH].
116 - ENGLISH
Setting [RGB2 EDID MODE]
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].

ffThe [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB2 EDID MODE].

ffThe [RGB2 EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press qw to switch [EDID MODE].

[SCREEN FIT] Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
ffProceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

ffThe [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
ffThe [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
ff The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
ff Setting of the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency may be necessary on the computer or video device in use.
ff The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after setting.
ff The output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency may not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use.
[DVI-D IN]
Set this item in accordance with the video signal input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DVI-D IN]
1) Press as to select [DVI-D IN].

ffThe [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
ENGLISH - 117
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal of the external device (such as a
[0-255:PC]
computer) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Blu-
[16-235]
ray disc player) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.
Note
ff The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [DVI-D IN]

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].

[EDID3] Determines the moving image or still image signal automatically.

Select this item mainly when an external device that will output the moving image signal (such as a
[EDID1]
Blu-ray disc player) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
Select this item mainly when an external device that will output the still image signal (such as a
[EDID2:PC]
computer) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
Note
ff The data for plug and play will change when the setting is changed. Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 231) for details on a
resolution that supports plug and play.
Setting [EDID MODE] in [DVI-D IN]

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].

ffThe [DVI-D EDID MODE] screen is displayed.


118 - ENGLISH

gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
[HDMI IN]
Set this item in accordance with the video signal input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [HDMI IN]
1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.


Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a Blu-
[64-940]
ray disc player) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal of an external device (such as a
computer) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable.
[0-1023]
Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer or other device is
input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
Note
ff The HDMI signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [HDMI IN]


Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K video signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
[4K/60p]
vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).
[4K/30p]
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K video signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K video signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K video signal or
ENGLISH - 119
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” (x page 233).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [HDMI IN]


ffThe [HDMI EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

[USER] Set the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.

gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
[DIGITAL LINK IN]

Set this item in accordance with the video signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.

120 - ENGLISH

Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (Blu-ray disc
[64-940]
player, etc.) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal or HDMI terminal of an external
[0-1023] device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
Note
ff The signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]


[4K/60p]
[4K/30p]
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K video signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K video signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K video signal or
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” (x page 233).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]


ffThe [DIGITAL LINK EDID MODE] screen is displayed.


ENGLISH - 121

9) Press qw to switch [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
Note
[SDI IN]
Set this item in accordance with the signal input to the <SDI IN> terminal.
Setting [RESOLUTION]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].

ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RESOLUTION], and press the <ENTER> button.
4) Press as to select the item, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSelect [AUTO], [720x480i], [720x576i], [1280x720p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080sF], or
[2048x1080p].
Setting [3G-SDI MAPPING]

3) Press as to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].

[AUTO] Automatically selects [LEVEL A] or [LEVEL B].

[LEVEL A] Fixes the mapping method to 3G-SDI Level-A.
[LEVEL B] Fixes the mapping method to 3G-SDI Level-B.
Note
ff This item does not operate during SD‑SDI or HD‑SDI signal input.
Setting [SYSTEM SELECTOR]

122 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

Automatically selects [RGB], [YPBPR 4:4:4], or [YPBPR 4:2:2].

[AUTO] [RGB], [YPBPR 4:4:4], or [YPBPR 4:2:2] is automatically selected by reading the payload ID attached to
the input signal. [RGB] is selected when the payload ID is not attached to the input signal.
[RGB] Fixes to [RGB].
[YPBPR 4:4:4] Fixes to [YPBPR 4:4:4].
[YPBPR 4:2:2] Fixes to [YPBPR 4:2:2].
Setting [BIT DEPTH]

3) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].

[AUTO] Automatically selects [12-bit] or [10-bit].
[12-bit] Fixes to [12-bit].
[10-bit] Fixes to [10-bit].
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL]


[64-940] Normally use this setting.
[4-1019] Select this item when gray is displayed as black.
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
Setting [OSD POSITION]

Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].

[2] Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3] Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4] Sets to the top center of the screen.
ENGLISH - 123
[5] Sets to the center of the screen.

[6] Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7] Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8] Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9] Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
[1] Sets to the upper left of the screen.
Setting [OSD ROTATION]

Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).

3) Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].

[OFF] Does not rotate the screen.
[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.
Setting [OSD COLOR]

Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).

3) Press as to select [OSD COLOR].

[1] Sets to yellow.
[2] Sets to blue.
[3] Sets to white.
[4] Sets to green.
[5] Sets to peach.
[6] Sets to brown.
Setting [OSD MEMORY]

Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.

3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].

[ON] Holds the cursor position.
[OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.
124 - ENGLISH
Note
ff Even if [ON] is set, the cursor position is not maintained when the power is turned off.
Setting [INPUT GUIDE]

Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION].
Input guide is a screen to display information such as the currently selected input terminal name, signal name,
memory number, and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].

3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].

[ON] Displays the input guide.

[OFF] Hides the input guide.
Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]

Set the display/hide of the warning message.

3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].

[ON] Displays the warning message.

[OFF] Hides the warning message.
Note
ff If [OFF] is set, the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even when warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE
WARNING] is detected while using the projector. Also, the following countdown message is not displayed: the message until the power
is turned off after the no signal shut-off function is executed; the message until the light source is turned off after the no signal lights-out
function is executed
[MENU MODE]
Set the display mode of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [MENU MODE].

[NORMAL] Displays all menu items.

[SIMPLE] Displays some of the menu items that are used for basic setting or adjustment.
Note
ff For the menu items that are displayed when [SIMPLE] is set, refer to “Main menu” (x page 84) and “Sub-menu” (x page 85).
[IMAGE ROTATION]
Set whether to rotate the input image when projecting.
1) Press as to select [IMAGE ROTATION].
ENGLISH - 125
2) Press qw to select an item.

[OFF] Projects the input image without rotating.

[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° clockwise and project it.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° counterclockwise and project it.
Note
ff The on-screen display direction does not change even when this item is set to anything other than [OFF]. Set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
→ [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD ROTATION] as required.
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.
1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].

[BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.

[BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
ff The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACK COLOR]
ff To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”.
The software can be downloaded from the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].


[NONE] Disables the startup logo display.
Note
ff When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the startup logo is not displayed when the projection is started
before the specified time has elapsed after going into the standby mode.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
[UNIFORMITY]
Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
Setting each color
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].

ffThe [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
126 - ENGLISH
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment

The lower-side color becomes
Press w. pale, or the upper-side color
becomes dark.
[VERTICAL]
The upper-side color becomes
Press q. pale, or the lower-side color
becomes dark.
-127 - +127
The left-side color becomes pale,
Press w. or the right-side color becomes
dark.
[HORIZONTAL]
The right-side color becomes
Press q. pale, or the left-side color
becomes dark.
Setting [PC CORRECTION]

Set the [PC CORRECTION] function to correct the brightness and the color unevenness of the entire screen using
a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.
To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) is required. To purchase
the product, consult your dealer.
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].

ffThe [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PC CORRECTION].
[OFF] Does not perform correction using a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management Software”*1.
Corrects the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen using a computer and “Geometric
[ON]
& Setup Management Software”*1.
*1 “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/). It is necessary
to register and login to PASS to download.
Note
ff The adjustment value for [UNIFORMITY] will not return to factory default even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL
USER DATA] is executed. The [PC CORRECTION] setting will return to [OFF] of the factory default.
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set the operation of the shutter function.
Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]

Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates.
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

ffThe [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
Item Adjustment
[OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
[FADE-IN] Sets the fade-in or fade-out time.
[FADE-OUT] [0.5s] - [10.0s] Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -
ENGLISH - 127
Note
ff Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.
Setting [STARTUP]
Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/open) when the power is turned on.

3) Press as to select [STARTUP].
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the
[OPEN]
power is turned on.
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the
[CLOSE]
power is turned on.
Setting the shutter synchronization function

The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector
to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade out/fade in operation can be
synchronized.
To use the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization
in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the
<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of how to connect the projectors, refer to
“Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function”
(x page 55).

3) Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

ffThe [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function
[OFF]
are not used.
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
[MAIN]
Set this item only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation
within the linked projectors.
[SUB] used.
Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].
ffWhen anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating
if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if
[MODE] is correctly set.
All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast
[LINKED]
synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status
[NO LINK]
and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.
128 - ENGLISH
7) Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].

[OFF] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
[ON] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
For details on contrast synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] (x page 152).
ff The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)
gg [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].
gg [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].
ff It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
ff The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER
SETTING] of the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].
ff When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to
1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.
ff The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. At that time, the shutter operation will follow the
setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.
[FREEZE]
Stop the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.
1) Press as to select [FREEZE].

ffPress the <MENU> button to release.
Note
ff [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output
(luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.
1) Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].
[OFF] Does not display the waveform monitor.

[ON] Displays the waveform monitor.
3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.
4) Press as to select any horizontal line.
5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.
ffLine selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is
displayed.
“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.

“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.
“Select line (green)” Displayed in green waveform.
“Select line (blue)” Displayed in blue waveform.
Note
ff Setting is also available from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
ff The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).
ENGLISH - 129
Adjusting the waveform

Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and
adjust.
Signal level
Image displayable area
Image position
1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.
2) Adjust black level.

ffAdjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor using the
[PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS].
3) Adjust white level.
ffAdjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor using the
[PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST].
Adjusting red, green, and blue
1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2]. (x page 89)
2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.
3) Adjust dark red areas.

ffUse [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position
of the waveform monitor.
4) Adjust bright red areas.
ffUse [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 %
position of the waveform monitor.
5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].
Note
ff Confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting of the input signal is correct before adjusting the black level.
Confirm the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN]/[HDMI IN]/[DIGITAL LINK IN]/[SDI IN] → [SIGNAL
LEVEL].
[CUT OFF]
Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.
1) Press as to select [CUT OFF].

ffThe [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.

[OFF] Disables cutoff.
[ON] Enables cutoff.
Note
ff When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
130 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side
to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].

[ALL] Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64] Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
ff To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
ff When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer
control.
If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
ff Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” (x page 81) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.
Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted.
Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.
Setting [FRONT/REAR]
1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

ffThe [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FRONT/REAR].

[FRONT] Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.
[REAR] Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).
Setting [FLOOR/CEILING]
1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

ffThe [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FLOOR/CEILING].

Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor.
[AUTO]
Set [AUTO] normally.
[FLOOR] Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
ENGLISH - 131
Select this item when installing the projector using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional).
[CEILING]
Projected image is inverted upside down.
Note
ff Refer to “Angle sensor” (x page 39) for details on the range of the installation attitude that can be detected by the built-in angle sensor.
[LENS]
Perform the setting and operation regarding the projection lens.
[LENS TYPE]
When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE]
setting. Change the setting if the type does not match the projection lens attached to the projector.

3) Press as to select [LENS TYPE].

Select this item when a projection lens anything other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020)
[NORMAL]
or the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used for projection.
[ET-DLE035] Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE035) is used for projection.
[ET-DLE020] Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE020) is used for projection.
Note
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [LENS TYPE] is set incorrectly.
[LENS HOME POSITION]

Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.

3) Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

Note
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [LENS TYPE] is set incorrectly. Change the setting if the type does
not match the projection lens attached to the projector.
ff [LENS HOME POSITION] can also be executed by pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the lens shift adjustment
screen is displayed.
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Detect the lens shift adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range.

132 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

ffThe lens calibration is started.
ffAfter completing the calibration, the projection lens will move to the home position.
ffTo cancel, select [CANCEL].
Note
ff [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when the lens calibration is not performed correctly.
ff The origin position of the lens mounter and the home position of the projection lens are automatically updated when the lens calibration is
performed.
The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It
does not match with the optical image center position.
ff Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration
execution.
[OPERATION SETTING]
Set the operation method of the projector.
The settings are reflected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 61) in the [INITIAL SETTING]
screen is already set.
If you change the settings while using the projector, the estimated runtime may shorten or the luminance may
decrease.
Setting [OPERATING MODE]
1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].

ffThe [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].

ffSet [OPERATING MODE] to [NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] when using the projector at an
altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
[NORMAL] Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to increase the expected life of
[ECO]
the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low
[QUIET1]*3
noise is prioritized. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [QUIET1], but select this item when operating the projector
[QUIET2]*3
with less noise. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
The luminance will decrease compared to [ECO], but set this item to increase the expected life of the
[LONG LIFE1]
light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 43 000 hours*2.
[LONG LIFE2]
[LONG LIFE3]
[USER1]
[USER2] [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually.
[USER3]
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
*2 Estimated runtime is the time the initial brightness of the long life mode is basically maintained constant when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3].
ENGLISH - 133
5) Press as to select [APPLY].

Note
ff The [OPERATING MODE] setting does not return to factory default setting even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL
USER DATA] is executed.
ff In the case of [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [OFF], if [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE1], [LONG
LIFE2] or [LONG LIFE3], [CONSTANT MODE] will automatically switch to [AUTO] and the items of [OPERATING MODE], [MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be selected.
Setting [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]

Adjust the maximum level to correct screen brightness according to the changes in brightness of the light source.

3) Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

Press w. Increases the maximum level of brightness correction.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q. Decreases the maximum level of brightness correction.

Note
ff When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL], [ECO], [QUIET1], [QUIET2], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2] or [LONG LIFE3], the item of
[MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] cannot be adjusted.
ff The brightness is corrected using this setting when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC].
ff The [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] setting does not return to factory default setting even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE]
→ [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
Setting [LIGHT OUTPUT]

Adjust the brightness of light source.
The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LIGHT OUTPUT]. The
most recent setting is reflected in both items.

Adjustment
8.0 % - 100.0 %
134 - ENGLISH

Note
ff [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be adjusted if [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2] or [LONG LIFE3] and the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC].
ff In such a case when configuring multiple screens with multiple projectors, uniformity of brightness between multiple screens can be obtained
by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT].
Relationship between brightness and runtime

The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by combining the settings of [MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make
the setting depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.
The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just
an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.
rrPT-RZ990
100.0 9 400 20 000
70.2 6 600 27 000
39.4 3 700 34 000
24.5 2 300 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 9 400
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0 2 300
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

53.0 5 000 20 000
48.9 4 600 24 000
45.7 4 300 27 000
41.5 3 900 31 000
37.2 3 500 35 000
33.0 3 100 40 000
ENGLISH - 135
100.0 9 400
Brightness
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
5 000
50.0
40.0
3 100
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
rrPT-RZ890
100.0 8 500 20 000
77.6 6 600 27 000
43.5 3 700 34 000
30.6 2 600 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 8 500
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0 2 600
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

58.8 5 000 20 000
55.3 4 700 24 000
51.8 4 400 27 000
47.1 4 000 31 000
43.5 3 700 35 000
38.8 3 300 40 000
100.0 8 500
Brightness
90.0
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0 5 000
50.0
40.0 3 300
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
rrPT-RZ790
100.0 7 000 20 000
70.0 4 900 27 000
136 - ENGLISH

35.7 2 500 34 000
21.4 1 500 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 7 000
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0 1 500
10.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000

52.9 3 700 20 000
48.6 3 400 24 000
45.7 3 200 27 000
41.4 2 900 31 000
37.1 2 600 35 000
32.9 2 300 40 000
100.0 7 000
Brightness
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0 3 700
40.0
30.0 2 300
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
rrPT-RZ690
100.0 6 000 20 000
70.0 4 200 27 000
38.3 2 300 34 000
25.0 1 500 37 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
100.0 6 000
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
1 500
20.0
20 000 23 400 26 800 30 200 33 600 37 000
ENGLISH - 137

53.3 3 200 20 000
48.3 2 900 24 000
45.0 2 700 27 000
41.7 2 500 31 000
38.3 2 300 35 000
33.3 2 000 40 000
100.0 6 000
[LIGHT OUTPUT](%)
Brightness
90.0
Brightness (lm)
80.0
70.0
60.0
3 200
50.0
40.0
2 000
30.0
20.0
20 000 24 000 28 000 32 000 36 000 40 000
Hours
Note
ff The runtime may be shorter than the estimation due to the influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation
environment, etc.
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]

Set the operation of the brightness control function.
The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. The most recent setting is reflected in both
items.


[AUTO] When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is
automatically corrected.
[PC]

projectors.
[OFF]
OUTPUT] smaller.
138 - ENGLISH
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]

ffThe projector will go into the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
9) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time.
ffSelecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows
setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
ffWhen the time is not specified, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the
minute.
during measurement.

[ON] Displays messages during calibration.

[OFF] Does not display messages during calibration.

ffWhen [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to anything other than [OFF], the
brightness and white balance of light source at the time when the <ENTER> button is pressed is recorded
as the standard brightness and white balance.
f If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is
f
displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
LINK GROUP A
15) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter
function disabled (shutter: open) for at least two minutes, since the brightness sensor calibration is performed after the [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] setting has been completed.
ff Since the brightness and the color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after turning on the light source when
the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness and the color
of the light source will be automatically measured approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based
on this measurement result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and color when adjusted with
the brightness control.
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the items of [OPERATING
MODE], [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be changed.
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO], and [LINK] set to [OFF], the
brightness will be corrected. The correction level can be up to the value set in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
ff The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation
environment of the projector.
ff When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the
brightness control.
ff When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set the [CALIBRATION TIME] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. If it is
not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
ff The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reflected when you enter the time.
ff The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reflected when items are switched using qw.
ENGLISH - 139
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjust the brightness of light source.
The setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 61) in the [INITIAL
SETTING] screen or with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. The [LIGHT OUTPUT]
setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [LIGHT OUTPUT].
The most recent setting is reflected in both items.
Adjustment
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Note
ff [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be adjusted if [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2] or [LONG LIFE3] and the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC].
ff In such a case when configuring multiple screens with multiple projectors, uniformity of brightness between multiple screens can be obtained
by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT].
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
The projector is equipped with a brightness sensor to measure brightness and color of the light source, and
corrects brightness and white balance of the projected image according to the changes in brightness and color of
the light source.
By using this function, in such a condition that multiple screens are configured using multiple projectors, you can
reduce changes in overall brightness and white balance of the multiple screens due to aging of the light source
and suppress variation in brightness and white balance to preserve uniformity.
The setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 61) in the [INITIAL
SETTING] screen or with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. The [BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SETUP] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] →
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. The most recent setting is reflected in both items.
Set the administrator accounts (user name and password) of all linked projectors to the same when performing
brightness control of multiple projectors in synchronization.
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]

Set the operation of the brightness control function.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

ffThe [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].

ffThe [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.

[AUTO] When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the projected image
is automatically corrected.
[PC]
140 - ENGLISH

projectors.
[OFF]
OUTPUT] smaller.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]

ffThe projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
time.
ffSelecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows
setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
ffWhen the time is not specified, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the
minute.
during measurement.

[ON] Displays messages during calibration.

[OFF] Does not display messages during calibration.

ffIf the <ENTER> button is pressed with [CONSTANT MODE] set to anything other than [OFF], the brightness
and white balance of light source at the time when the button is pressed is recorded as the standard
brightness and white balance.
ffIf the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is
displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
LINK GROUP A
Note
ff When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter function disabled (shutter: open) for at least two minutes, since the
brightness sensor calibration is performed after the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting has been completed.
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness and color of the light source do not
stabilize for approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. Therefore, the brightness and color of the light source will be
automatically measured after approximately eight minutes have elapsed after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based on
this measurement result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and color when adjusted with the
brightness control.
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the items of [OPERATING
MODE], [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be changed.
ff When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] set to [AUTO], and [LINK] set to [OFF], the brightness will be corrected. The
correction level can be up to the value set in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
ff The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation
environment of the projector.
brightness control.
ENGLISH - 141
ff When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set [CALIBRATION TIME]. If it is not set, correction will not be performed
automatically.
ff The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reflected when you enter the time.
ff The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reflected at the time when the item is switched using qw.
Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]

Display the brightness control status.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
ffThe [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].
ffThe [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen display example

When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]
The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
CONSTANT MODE OFF
PROJECTOR
1
MENU RETURN
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [OFF]

The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one projector.
LINK OFF
5
PROJECTOR 1
MENU RETURN
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [GROUP A] through [GROUP D]
The screen shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the
projector being controlled through the on-screen menu.
1
LINK GROUP A
2
PROJECTOR 192. 168. 30. 2 3
1: PROJECTOR2 192. 168. 30. 3
2: PROJECTOR3 192. 168. 30. 4
3:
4: 4
5:
6:
7:
UPDATE 5
MENU SELECT
142 - ENGLISH
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [PC]

CONSTANT MODE PC
5
PROJECTOR 1
MENU RETURN
1 Display the name of the projector.

2 Display the synchronized group.
3 Display the IP address of the projector.
4 Display the names and IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network.
5 Display the status by color.
Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.
Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.
Red: There is a brightness control error.
6 Display error detailed messages.
7 Display error messages.
When the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.] appears, it means that synchronization with the
projector displayed in red has failed.
Press as to select the projector displayed in red, and press the <ENTER> button to display the error details.
8 Update to the latest status information.
rrError details
Error message Measures to take
ff Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.
[Exceed maximum number of
projectors.] ff To synchronize nine or more projectors, use a PC and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring &
Control Software”*1.
ff Set the password of the administrator account.
[Please check the COMMAND
ff Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for the projector in error.
CONTROL setting.]
ff Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT] of all linked projectors to the same value.
[Please check the USER NAME
and PASSWORD in the COMMAND ff Set the administrator accounts (user name and password) of all linked projectors to the same.
CONTROL setting.]
[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL. Please check projector ff The projector is in standby. Switch on the power.
status.]
ff There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the
[Brightness Sensor Error]
power, consult your dealer.
Note
ff If the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list, check the following:
gg Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?
gg Are LAN cables connected correctly? (x page 181)
gg Are the subnets of the projectors the same?
gg Are the same [LINK] settings applied to a group?
ff Refer to [PROJECTOR NAME] (x page 172) or “[Network config] page” (x page 191) on how to change the projector name.
Brightness control adjustment procedure example

The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network.
1) Connect all projectors to the switching hub using LAN cables. (x page 181)
2) Switch on all projectors and start projection.
3) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], and select [APPLY], and then
press the <ENTER> button.
4) Set [OPERATING MODE] of each projector to the same setting. (x page 133)
5) Set [SUBNET MASK] and [IP ADDRESS] in each projector.

ffTo be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in [SUBNET MASK] for all projectors and
set a different value in [IP ADDRESS] for each projector.
ENGLISH - 143
6) Wait for at least eight minutes after projection has started until the light source brightness becomes
steady.
7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of all projectors to the same values.
8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.
9) Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.
10) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all projectors to 100 % or the maximum value that can be set.
ffDepending on the [OPERATING MODE] settings, [LIGHT OUTPUT] may not be able to be set to 100 %.
11) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of the projector with the least brightness to 90 % or 10 % lower than the
maximum value that can be set.
12) Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of each projector.

ffAdjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all the other projectors so that the brightness will be the same as the projector
with the least brightness.
13) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in
all projectors.
14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press the <ENTER> button in all projectors.
ffBrightness control starts.
Note
ff Brightness is automatically corrected whenever the light source lights up by switching on/off the projector, etc.
brightness control.
[STANDBY MODE]
Set the power consumption during standby.
1) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].

[NORMAL] Select this item when using the network function during standby.
[ECO] Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.
Note
ff When [ECO] is set, the network function, the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal, and some RS‑232C commands become
inoperable during standby. When [NORMAL] is set, the network function and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal can
be used during standby.
ff When [ECO] is set, it may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on,
compared with when [NORMAL] is set.
ff The [STANDBY MODE] setting does not return to factory default setting even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL
[QUICK STARTUP]
Set if the [QUICK STARTUP] function is enabled or disabled.
1) Press as to select [QUICK STARTUP].

[OFF] Disables the [QUICK STARTUP] function.

Enables the [QUICK STARTUP] function until the specified time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after
[ON] the projector enters the standby mode. The time until the projection starts after the power is turned on
will be reduced during the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid.
ffProceed to Step 3) when [ON] is selected.
144 - ENGLISH

ffThe [QUICK STARTUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press qw to switch [VALID PERIOD].
[30MIN.] Sets the time until the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled after the projector enters the standby
[60MIN.] mode.
[90MIN.] Select a desired valid period.
Note
ff [QUICK STARTUP] cannot be set when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power consumption during standby becomes high during the period when the [QUICK
STARTUP] function is valid.
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled when the time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the
projector enters the standby mode. The startup time and power consumption will be the same as when [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks red while in the standby mode during the period
when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid. The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights up red when the specified time set in [VALID
PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the standby mode.
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid is counted as the projector runtime.
[NO SIGNAL SETTING]

Set the operation of the function when there is no input signal.
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input
signal is disrupted.
Using the SDI input and HDMI input or DVI‑D input
1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.


7) Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.
Primary input Secondary input Details

[OFF] Disables the backup function.
[DVI-D] [HDMI]
[SDI] [DVI-D] Enables the backup function.
[SDI] [HDMI]

ffWhen [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected.
ENGLISH - 145
Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input
[ENABLE]
(secondary input) is disrupted.
Note
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to a combination of the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input.
gg Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.
ff If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to
use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or
secondary input.
The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary input
is displayed.
The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary input
is displayed.
ff When the combination of the input for [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input, the input
switches seamlessly if the input is switched between the primary input and the secondary input while the signal of the backup input can be
switched.
ff When the combination of inputs in [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is the SDI input and DVI‑D input or the SDI input and HDMI input, the backup
function is enabled only in the following combination of signals.
Primary input Secondary input

[SDI] [DVI-D]/[HDMI]
3G‑SDI 1080/60i RGB 1080/60i RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/50i RGB 1080/50i RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/24p RGB 1080/24p RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/25p RGB 1080/25p RGB
3G‑SDI 1080/30p RGB 1080/30p RGB
Using the DVI‑D input and HDMI input


146 - ENGLISH

7) Press as to select the combination of the DVI‑D input and HDMI input and press the <ENTER>
button.

[ENABLE] Switches to the secondary input automatically when the input signal for primary input is disrupted.
Note
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to a combination of the DVI‑D input and HDMI input.
gg Display the image of the primary input.
ff In the following cases, the state of readiness is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, switch to the
primary input and enter the state of readiness.
gg When switching to an input other than the primary input from the state of readiness
gg When switching to the secondary input while the backup function is active
[SECONDARY INPUT]
Set the secondary input switching function that will automatically switch to the specified input when the input signal
of projecting image is discontinued.

3) Press as to select [SECONDARY INPUT].

ffThe [SECONDARY INPUT] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the input to be specified as the switching destination, and press the <ENTER>
button.
[OFF] Disables the secondary input switching function.

[DIGITAL LINK] *1
Sets the secondary input to DIGITAL LINK*1.
[HDMI] Sets the secondary input to HDMI.
ENGLISH - 147
[DVI-D] Sets the secondary input to DVI-D.

[RGB 1] Sets the secondary input to RGB 1.
[RGB 2] Sets the secondary input to RGB 2.
[SDI] Sets the secondary input to SDI.
*1 Individual input on the twisted-pair-cable transmitter or the DIGITAL LINK output supported device cannot be specified.
Note
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to
anything other than [OFF], the secondary input switching function will not operate even when [SECONDARY INPUT] is set to anything other
than [OFF]. The backup input switching function is prioritized.
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.

3) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].

[BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.

[BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
Note
ff The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACK COLOR]
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]

This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specific
period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].

[DISABLE] Disables the no signal lights-out function.

Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.
[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]
Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].
Note
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the no signal lights-out function is operating and the light source is
turned off.
ff When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on
again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the signal has been input
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
gg When the power on <b> button is pressed
gg When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: open) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button
gg When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
148 - ENGLISH
ff The no signal lights-out function is disabled in following cases.

gg When [BACK COLOR] is set to [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO], and the Panasonic logo or the image registered by the user is
displayed in the projected image
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

This is a function to automatically set the power of the projector to standby mode when there is no input signal for
specific period. The time before switching to standby can be set.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].

[DISABLE] Disables the no signal shut-off function.

[10MIN.] - [90MIN.] Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.
[INITIAL STARTUP]
Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.
1) Press as to select [INITIAL STARTUP].

[LAST MEMORY] Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
[STANDBY] Starts up the projector in standby.
[ON] Starts projecting immediately.
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].

ffThe [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.
[LAST USED] Keeps the input selected last.

[RGB1] Sets the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Sets the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Sets the input to DVI‑D.
[HDMI] Sets the input to HDMI.
[DIGITAL LINK] Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI] Sets the input to SDI.
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*1
to the specified input.
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
Note
ff When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to a combination of the DVI‑D input
and HDMI input, and the power is turned off with the input set to HDMI during previous use, the projection will start with the DVI‑D input
even if [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] is set to [LAST USED].
[DATE AND TIME]

Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.
ENGLISH - 149
Setting the time zone
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].

ffThe [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].
4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].
Setting the date and time manually

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Setting the date and time automatically

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].

ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
ff To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.
ff If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON], [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to
[OFF]. If [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
ff Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 192) for details.
ff The [TIME ZONE] setting is reset to the factory default when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA]
is executed. However, the date and time based on the local date and time setting (Coordinated Universal Time, UTC, Universal Time,
Coordinated) will be maintained without being initialized.
ff The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.
Enabling/disabling the schedule function
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].

150 - ENGLISH
[OFF] Disables the schedule function.

Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 151) or “How to set a
[ON]
program” (x page 151) for how to set the schedule.
Note
ff When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON] while the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the [STANDBY MODE]
setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed to [ECO]. The [STANDBY MODE] setting will not return to
original even if [SCHEDULE] is set to [OFF] in this condition.
How to assign a program
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Select and assign a program to each day of week.
ffPress as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.
ffYou can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “‑ ‑ ‑” indicates that the program number has not been set.
How to set a program

Set up to 16 commands to each program.
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.

ffYou can change the page using qw.
6) Press asqw to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
time, and then press the <ENTER> button.
8) Press asqw to select [COMMAND].

ffThe [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].
ffFor [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time
you press qw.
ffWhen [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to be
set.
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND] Description
[COMMAND]
[POWER ON] ― Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY] ― Enters standby.
Enables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK
[ON]
STARTUP].
[QUICK STARTUP]
Disables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK
[OFF]
STARTUP].
[OPEN] Disables the shutter function (shutter: open).
[SHUTTER]
[CLOSE] Enables the shutter function (shutter: closed).
ENGLISH - 151
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND] Description
[COMMAND]
[RGB1] Switches the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Switches the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Switches the input to DVI‑D.
[HDMI] Switches the input to HDMI.
[INPUT]
[DIGITAL LINK] Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI] Switches the input to SDI.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*1
DIGITAL LINK output supported device to the specified input.
[NORMAL] Prioritizes luminance.
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source with higher
[ECO]
luminance.
Operates the projector with low noise although the luminance is
[QUIET1]*3
lower than that of [NORMAL].
Operates the projector with less noise although the luminance is
[QUIET2]*3
lower than that of [QUIET1].
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source although
[LONG LIFE1]
[OPERATING MODE]*2 the luminance is lower than that of [ECO].
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source although
[LONG LIFE2]
the luminance is even lower than that of [LONG LIFE1].
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source to the
[LONG LIFE3] maximum although the luminance is even lower than that of [LONG
LIFE2].
[USER1] Controls the power with the setting set in [USER1].
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
*2 If you change the settings while using the projector, the estimated runtime may shorten or the luminance may decrease.

ffThe command is fixed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.
ffAfter the command is fixed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.
12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff To delete a command that has been already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the screen in Step 5) is
displayed, or select [DELETE] at the screen in Step 6) and press the <ENTER> button.
ff If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command
number.
ff The operating time will be the local time. (x page 149)
ff If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in
[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with the schedule function may not be executed.
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

Set the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function.
The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by
sharing the brightness level of the video signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed
by combining the projected image of multiple projectors. The shutter synchronization function is a function to
synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter
function including the fade out/fade in operation can be synchronized.
To use the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect
the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <SERIAL/MULTI
PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of
how to connect the projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/
shutter synchronization function” (x page 55).
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.
152 - ENGLISH
ff The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is the same as the following setting items.
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
Setting the contrast synchronization function


[OFF]
are not used.
used.
Set this item only on one projector out of the projectors that are linked.
[MAIN]
The projector set as the [MAIN] will calculate the brightness level of the video signal to become
optimum on the whole combined screen for each frame. All the projectors targeted for contrast
synchronization will control the dynamic contrast function based on the calculation result.
[SUB] used.
[LINKED]
[NO LINK]
5) Press as to select [CONTRAST SYNC].

[OFF] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is not used.
[ON] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].
ff It is possible to set [CONTRAST SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
Setting the shutter synchronization function


[OFF]
are not used.
ENGLISH - 153
[MAIN] used.
Set this item only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation.
[SUB] used.
[LINKED]
[NO LINK]
5) Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].

[OFF] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
[ON] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].
ff It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
ff The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER
SETTING] on the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].
ff When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to
1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.
ff The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. At that time, the shutter operation will follow the
setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.
[RS-232C]
Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI
PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals. For details on the connection method for RS‑232C communication, refer to
“<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals” (x page 225).
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].
Performs the RS‑232C communication with the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal of
[PROJECTOR]
the projector.
Performs the RS‑232C communication via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model
[DIGITAL LINK]
No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].

154 - ENGLISH
[9600]
[19200] Select the proper speed.
[38400]
7) Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].

[NONE]
[EVEN] Select the parity condition.
[ODD]
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal

3) Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].
[9600]
[19200] Select the proper speed.
[38400]
5) Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].

[NONE]
[EVEN] Select the parity condition.
[ODD]
Setting the response

3) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].
[ON] Returns the response when an ID is designated as ALL.

[OFF] Does not return the response when an ID is designated as ALL.
5) Press as to select [GROUP].
Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS‑232C. You can set groups from [A]
[A] - [Z]
to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS‑232C matches the setting.
7) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].
ENGLISH - 155
[ON] Returns the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.

[OFF] Does not return the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.
Note
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication using that serial terminal is available only when the corresponding device
(such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G)) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal.
ff When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication speed for input is fixed to 9 600 bps and the parity is fixed to “NONE”.
[REMOTE2 MODE]
Set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
1) Press as to select [REMOTE2 MODE].

[DEFAULT] Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal in standard setting. (x page 229)
[USER] Changes the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
ffProceed to Step 3) when [USER] is selected.

4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.
1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].

ffThe [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNCTION> button.

[SUB MEMORY] Displays the sub memory list. (x page 165)
Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting according to the input signal of the image being
projected.
ff When the input signal is anything other than the SDI input
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] (x page 94)
ff When the input signal is the SDI input
The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] (x page 122)
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 92)
[FREEZE] Freezes the image temporarily. (x page 129)
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] Displays the waveform of the input signal. (x page 129)
[ASPECT] Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (x page 97)
[PROJECTION METHOD] Switches the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting. (x page 131)
[STATUS]
Display the status of the projector.
1) Press as to select [STATUS].

ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
156 - ENGLISH
3) Press qw to switch the pages.

ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[PROJECTOR TYPE] Displays the type of the projector.

[SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the projector.
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the projector.
[LIGHT RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
Displays the elapsed time from when the light source is illuminated.
[CONTINUOUS LIGHTING The elapsed time after the illumination of the light source can be confirmed when adjusting the focus.
TIME] The elapsed time is reset when the light source is temporarily turned off such as using the shutter
function.
[MAIN/SUB VERSION] Displays the main and sub versions of the firmware of the projector.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.] *1
Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the projector.
[LIGHT1 TEMP.] *1
Displays the status of the light source 1 temperature of the projector.
[LIGHT2 TEMP.]*1 Displays the status of the light source 2 temperature of the projector.
[SELF TEST] Displays the status of the projector.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[MEMORY NO.] Displays the memory number of the input signal.
Displays whether switching to the backup input signal is possible or not when [BACKUP INPUT
[BACKUP INPUT STATUS]
MODE] is set to [OFF]. (x page 114)
[NUMBER OF REGISTERED
Displays the number of registered signals.
SIGNAL]
[COOLING CONDITION] Displays the set cooling conditions.
[ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE] Displays the atmospheric pressure.
[REMOTE2 STATUS] Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.
[AC VOLTAGE] Displays the input supply voltage.
[ON COUNT] [POWER ON TIMES] Displays the number of times the power is turned on.
Displays the activation status by the Upgrade Kit (Model No.:
[ET-UK20]
ET‑UK20).
[UPGRADE KIT]
Displays the activation status by the Auto Screen Adjustment
[ET-CUK10]
Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑CUK10).
Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] →
[OPERATING MODE]
[OPERATING MODE].
[NORMAL] Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL].
[ECO] Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO].
[QUIET1] *2
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [QUIET1].
[QUIET2]*2 Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [QUIET2].
[LONG LIFE1] Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [LONG LIFE1].
[USER1] Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER1].
Converts the total runtime of the light sources with [OPERATING MODE] set to each item into the
time used with the [NORMAL] setting.
[CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME] *3
The converted runtime is used for a rough indication about when to perform maintenance when the
projector is used in combination of each item in [OPERATING MODE].
ENGLISH - 157
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal used for the projected image.
[SIGNAL FORMAT] Displays the format of the input signal.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[SYNC.STATE] Displays the sync polarity of the input signal.
[V.SYNC WIDTH] Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal.
[SCAN TYPE] Displays the scan type of the input signal.
[TOTAL DOTS] Displays the total dot count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY DOTS] Displays the number of input signal display dots.
[SIGNAL INFORMATION] [TOTAL LINES] Displays the total line count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY LINES] Displays the number of input signal display lines.
[SAMPLING] Displays the sampling information of the input signal.
[SIGNAL LEVEL] Displays the signal level of the input signal.
[BIT DEPTH] Displays the gradation of the input signal.
Displays the HDCP status of the input signal. The content of display
is as follows.
[HDCP STATUS] [HDCP2.2]: When protected with HDCP 2.2
[HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X
[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP
*1 The temperature status is indicated with text color (green/yellow/red) and bar scale. Use the projector within the range that the indication is
green.
*3 [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME] can be obtained with the following calculation formula. Values obtained by the calculation formula contain a
slight error.
Conversion formula for [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME]

A x 1.0 + B x 0.8 + C x 0.5 + D x 0.3 + E x 0.2
ff A: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL], [QUIET1], [QUIET2], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3]
ff B: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO]
ff C: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [LONG LIFE1]
ff D: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [LONG LIFE2]
ff E: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [LONG LIFE3]
Note
ff E-mail containing the status can be sent to the E-mail address (up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page” (x page 193) by pressing
the <ENTER> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ff Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be displayed and others not displayed, depending on the signal being input.
ff If any abnormality has occurred on the projector, press the <DEFAULT> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed to display the detail
screen of the error information.
ff For details on the contents displayed in [SELF TEST], refer to “[SELF TEST] indications” (x page 213).
[DATA CLONING]
Perform the operations of the data cloning function. Data such as the settings and adjustment values of the
projector can be copied to multiple projectors via LAN.
Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for using the data cloning function of
the projector.
rrData that cannot be copied

The following settings cannot be copied. Set these in each projector.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [ADJUST CLOCK]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [WRITE PROTECT]
ffThe [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [PROJECTOR NAME]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND PROTECT]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [PJLink] → [PJLink PASSWORD]
ffSecurity password
ffControl device password
ffPassword set in “[Set up password] page” (x pages 197, 198) of the web control screen
158 - ENGLISH
ff“[E-mail set up] page” (x page 193) in the web control screen

ff“[Authentication set up] page” (x page 194) in the web control screen
ff“[Network security] page” (x page 196) in the web control screen
ff“[Crestron tools] page” (x page 192) in the web control screen
ff“[Crestron Connected(TM)] page” (x page 199) in the web control screen
Note
ff The data cloning function will not operate when the models of the projectors are different. For example, data of PT-RZ990 can be copied to
other PT‑RZ990 projectors, but it cannot be copied to PT‑RZ890. Data cloning is limited to the same model.
Copying data to another projector

Set the administrator account password (x page 173) of all the projectors in advance.
Set the following settings on the projector of the copy destination in advance. Refer to “Setting [WRITE
PROTECT]” (x page 159) for details.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [WRITE PROTECT] → [OFF]
1) Connect all projectors to the switching hub using LAN cables. (x page 181)
2) Turn on all the projectors.
3) Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy source projector.

ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
5) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select [SELECT PROJECTOR].

ffThe projectors in the same subnet are displayed as a list.
8) Press as to select the copy destination projector.

ffTo select multiple projectors, repeat Steps 8) to 9).
ffStart the copy of data between projectors.
Once the copy is completed, results are displayed as a list in the [DATA CLONING] screen.
Meanings of the marks displayed in the list are as follows.
ggGreen: Data copy has succeeded.
ggRed: Data copy has failed. Confirm the connection of the LAN cable, power status and administrator
account password of the copy destination projector.
ffThe copy destination projector will display the data cloning request message, transfer to standby state
automatically, and perform the copy of the data.
12) Turn on the copy destination projector.
ffThe copied content is reflected to the projector.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password as the factory default: awsqawsq
ff The light source indicator <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> of the copy destination projector blink while copying
the data. Confirm the blinking of the indicators stops, and then turn on the power supply.
Setting [WRITE PROTECT]

Set if the copy of data using the data cloning function is permitted or not.
ENGLISH - 159
1) Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy destination projector.

ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [WRITE PROTECT].

[OFF] Permits operations of the data cloning function from another projector.
Does not permit the operations of the data cloning function from another projector.
[ON] ff Data copy will not be possible when [ON] is set. When it is not necessary to copy data of another
projector, set to [ON] so that the data is not changed by mistake.
Note
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].

ff[PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.
Note
ff Data set from the computer application is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
ff The data saved by executing [SAVE ALL USER DATA] is not deleted even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].

Note
ff The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.
ff Data registered from a computer is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[INITIALIZE]
Return various setting values to their factory default settings.
1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
160 - ENGLISH

ffThe [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select an item to initialize.
Returns all setting values including [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK/E-MAIL], and [LOGO
[ALL USER DATA] IMAGE] to the factory default settings.
The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values.
Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal.
[REGISTERED SIGNAL] To delete only a part of a registered signal, perform the procedure described in “Deleting the
registered signal” (x page 163).
Returns all the setting items under the [NETWORK] menu and all the setting items under the
operation page in the [Detailed set up] page and the Crestron Connected of the web control screen to
[NETWORK/E-MAIL] the factory default settings.
ff The items of [Time Zone], [Date], and [Time] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen do
not return to the factory default settings.
[LOGO IMAGE] Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].

Note
ff The following settings are not initialized even if [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] (except for [PC CORRECTION])
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [OPERATING MODE]
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE]
ff If [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen are displayed when the
projection is started the next time.
ff If [NETWORK/E-MAIL] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed when the projection is started the next time.
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
This function is used by a service person.
ENGLISH - 161
Chapter 4 Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
[TEST PATTERN] menu

On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
[TEST PATTERN]
Display the test pattern built-in to the projector.
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input
signal before performing various adjustments.
1) Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item.
Menu screen + All white

Menu screen + All black
Menu screen + Window
Menu screen + Window
(inversion)
Menu screen + Color bar
(vertical) Displays a test pattern with the menu screen. Select a desired test pattern.
Menu screen + Color bar
(horizontal)
Menu screen + 16:9/4:3
aspect frame
Menu screen + Cross hatch
Menu screen + Focus
Displays the menu screen and input signal.
Menu screen + Input screen
Internal test patterns are not displayed.
Note
ff Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen.
ff It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.
Changing the color of the cross hatch test pattern

The color can be changed when the “Menu screen + Cross hatch” cross hatch test pattern is displayed.
1) Press qw to select the “Menu screen + Cross hatch” test pattern.

ffThe [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe color of the cross hatch test pattern is changed to the selected color.
Note
ff The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] setting returns to [WHITE] when the projector is switched off.
ff Colors of the test patterns other than cross hatch test patterns cannot be changed.
162 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4 Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
[SIGNAL LIST] menu

On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
rrRegistered signal details

Memory number: A1 (1-2)
Sub memory number
When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered
ffA name can be set for each sub memory (x page 165) .

Registering new signals
After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the
registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
Note
ff Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
ff There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is
registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
ff The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.
ff If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered signal

Registered signals can be renamed.
1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.

ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
ffThe memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.
ffPress the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].

ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.
ffWhen pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name
will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.
Deleting the registered signal

Registered signals can be deleted.
1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.

ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
ffThe selected signal will be deleted.
ENGLISH - 163
Note
ff A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
Protecting the registered signal
1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.

4) Press as to select [LOCK].

[OFF] The signal is not protected.

[ON] The signal is protected.
ffA lock icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK] is set to [ON].
A1: 720/60p-A1 RGB2
A2: XXXXXX XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3 RGB2
Note
ff When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available. To perform these operations, set
[LOCK] to [OFF].
ff A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.
ff Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in range
1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.

4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].

[NARROW] Select this item usually.

[WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
ffAn expansion icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK-IN
RANGE] is set to [WIDE].
A1: 720/60p-A1 RGB2
A2: XXXXXX XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3 RGB2
Note
ff Switch the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.
ff To prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal, set this function to [WIDE].
ff Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
ff This function can be used only when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, the <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <DVI-D IN> terminal, the
<HDMI IN> terminal, or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
ff When [WIDE] is set, the image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies
slightly.
ff When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.
Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
164 - ENGLISH
ff When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.

ff In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the
setting is set to [WIDE].
Sub memory
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is
recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to switch the aspect or adjust the picture quality such as the white balance
while using the same signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal,
such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] menu (items such as [CONTRAST] and
[BRIGHTNESS]).
Registering to the sub memory
1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.

ffThe sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).
ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
ffThe <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of qw when [SUB MEMORY] is
selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
ffTo rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”
(x page 163).
Switching to the sub memory

ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

ffThis switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
Deleting the sub memory

ffThe [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the
remote control.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
ffThe selected sub memory will be deleted.
ENGLISH - 165
Chapter 4 Settings — [SECURITY] menu
[SECURITY] menu
On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
ffWhen the projector is used for the first time
Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
Attention
ff When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is prompted. Enter the preset password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
ff When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
Display the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen when the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set
to the <OFF> side. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the power standby
<v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>).
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].

[OFF] Disables the security password entry.

[ON] Enables the security password entry.
Note
ff This function is set to [OFF] as the factory default setting or after the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is
executed. Set it to [ON] as necessary.
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ff The security password is enabled after setting the item to [ON] and setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

Change the security password.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.
ffUp to eight button operations can be set.
5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff When numerical values are used for the security password, the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost.
Consult your dealer for the method of initialization.
[DISPLAY SETTING]
Overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image.
1) Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].
166 - ENGLISH

[OFF] Hides the security message.

[TEXT] Displays the text set in the [SECURITY] menu → [TEXT CHANGE].
Note
[TEXT CHANGE]
Edit the text to be displayed when [TEXT] is selected in [DISPLAY SETTING].
1) Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].

ffThe [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.

ffThe text is changed.
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
[CONTROL PANEL] Sets the limitation on the control from the control panel.
[REMOTE CONTROL] Sets the limitation on the control from the remote control.

ffThe [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.

ffYou can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.
[ENABLE] Enables all button operations.

[DISABLE] Disables all button operations.
Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
[USER]
Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 167) for details.

Enabling/disabling any button
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 167
6) Press qw to switch [USER].
7) Press as to select the button item to set.

ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select
the button to set.
Buttons that can be set

[CONTROL PANEL] [REMOTE CONTROL]
[POWER BUTTON] Power standby <v> button, power on <b> button
<RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button,
<RGB1/2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI>
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON] <HDMI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI>
button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button
button
[MENU BUTTON] <MENU> button
[LENS BUTTON] <LENS> button Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON] <AUTO SETUP> button
[SHUTTER BUTTON] <SHUTTER> button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON] ― <ON SCREEN> button
[OTHER BUTTON] asqw, <ENTER> button Buttons not listed above
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.

[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
ffThe following items can be selected only when [RGB1/2 BUTTON] of [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is
selected.
[TOGGLE] Switches between [RGB1] and [RGB2] when the button is operated.
[RGB1] Fixes to [RGB1].
[RGB2] Fixes to [RGB2].
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7), once the switching of the item is completed, press
the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen.
Note
ff When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
ff The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.
ff If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot
enter standby).
ff When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main
menu.
ff Even when button operations on the remote control are disabled, the operation of the <ID SET> button on the remote control is enabled.
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

The control device password can be changed.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].

ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
168 - ENGLISH

Attention
ff The initial password is “AAAA” as the factory default setting or after the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA]
is executed.
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ff To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
ENGLISH - 169
Chapter 4 Settings — [NETWORK] menu
[NETWORK] menu
On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
[ETHERNET TYPE]
Set the path for transmitting the Ethernet signal.
1) Press as to select [ETHERNET TYPE].

ffThe [ETHERNET TYPE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to switch the item.
[LAN] Select this item when using only the <LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.
[DIGITAL LINK] Select this item when using only the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.
Select this item when using the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal to transmit the
[LAN & DIGITAL LINK]
Ethernet signal.
Note
ff When [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN], the Ethernet and serial control signals cannot be transmitted via the optional DIGITAL LINK output
supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
ff When [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK], the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside
the projector. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system
so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Make settings and operations related to DIGITAL LINK.
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]

Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].

[AUTO] Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK, long reach, or Ethernet.
[DIGITAL LINK] Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.
[LONG REACH] Fixes the communication method to long reach.
[ETHERNET] Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.
Possible communication modes

l: Communication possible
―: Communication not possible
Communication possible
Setting Video transfer Video transfer
Ethernet RS‑232C
(100 m (328'1")) (150 m (492'2"))
For DIGITAL LINK l ― l l
[AUTO] For long reach ― l l l
For Ethernet ― ― l*1 ―
170 - ENGLISH
Communication possible
Setting Video transfer Video transfer
Ethernet RS‑232C
(100 m (328'1")) (150 m (492'2"))
[DIGITAL LINK] l ― l l
[LONG REACH] ― l l l
[ETHERNET] ― ― l*1 ―
*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.
Note
ff For the signal with the resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less, the maximum transmission distance is 100 m (328'1") when connected with
the DIGITAL LINK communication method. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission
distance is 50 m (164'1").
ff The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492'2"). In this case, the signal
that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff If the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach communication
method when the item is set to [AUTO]. To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET‑YFB200G) with the long-reach
communication method, set the item to [LONG REACH].
ff Even when the item is set to [LONG REACH], connection will not be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the
long-reach communication method.
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]

Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.

3) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].

ffThe [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
The content of display is as follows.
[DIGITAL LINK]: Communicating in the DIGITAL LINK method.
[LINK STATUS] [LONG REACH]: Communicating in the long reach method.
[ETHERNET]: Communicating in the Ethernet method.
[NO LINK]: Communication is not established.
The content of display is as follows.
[HDCP2.2]: When protected with HDCP 2.2
[HDCP STATUS] [HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X
[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP
[---]: When there is no signal
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to
green, yellow, or red depending on that value.
Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff [MAX]/[MIN]: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error
[SIGNAL QUALITY]
ff Green (-12 dB or lower) → normal signal quality level.
ff Yellow (-11 to -8 dB) → caution level that noise may appear on the screen.
ff Red (-7 dB or higher) → abnormal level with interrupted synchronization and receiving not
possible.
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]

When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected
to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, the main menu of the connected DIGITAL LINK output supported device is
displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device for details.
Note
ff [DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected when the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON].
ff The operation guidance for the “RETURN” button is in the menu screen of the Digital Interface Box and the DIGITAL LINK Switcher. The
projector does not have the “RETURN” button, but the same operation is available with the <MENU> button.
[EXTRON XTP]
Make connection setting for the "XTP transmitter" of Extron Electronics.
ENGLISH - 171

3) Press as to select [EXTRON XTP].

Select this item when connecting the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.:
[OFF]
ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
Select this item when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK/
[ON]
LAN> terminal.
Note
ff For details of the “XTP transmitter”, visit the website of Extron Electronics.
URL http://www.extron.com/
[WIRED LAN]
Perform the connection setting to use the wired LAN.
1) Press as to select [WIRED LAN].

ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the
menu.
If a DHCP server exists in the network where the projector is to be

[ON]
connected, obtains the IP address automatically.
[DHCP] If a DHCP server does not exist in the network where the projector
[OFF] is to be connected, set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and
[DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address when a DHCP server is not used.
[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask when a DHCP server is not used.
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Enter the default gateway address when a DHCP server is not used.

Note
ff When using a DHCP server, confirm that the DHCP server is running.
ff Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
ff The network setting is common for the <LAN> terminal and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
ff [WIRED LAN] cannot be selected when the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)].
[PROJECTOR NAME]
Change the projector name. Enter the host name if it is required to use a DHCP server.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR NAME].

ffThe [PROJECTOR NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
4) After entering the projector name, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
172 - ENGLISH
Note
ff The factory default setting of the projector name is “NAMExxxx”. xxxx is the four digit number assigned for each product.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Display the status of the projector network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].

ffThe [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[DHCP] Displays the status of use of the DHCP server.

[IP ADDRESS] Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK] Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1] Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2] Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.
[MAC ADDRESS] Displays the [MAC ADDRESS].
Note
ff The network setting is common for the <LAN> terminal and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
[PASSWORD POLICY]
Display the policies about the password for the administrator account.
1) Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

3) Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.
PASSWORD POLICY
Reusing passwords is not recommended.
Password cannot be blank.
A password consisting of at least eight

half-width characters and contaning
characters of at least three of the
following four types is recommended.
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Digits
Symbols(~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
MENU RETURN
Setting the administrator account for the first time


3) Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ENGLISH - 173

Note
ff If the password of the administrator account has not been set, that is, if it is left blank, the network function of this projector cannot be used.
Set a password before using the web control function or the communication control (including operation with application software) via LAN.
ff The user name and password of a standard user account without administrator rights can be set on the [Set up password] page (x page 197)
of the web control screen.
Changing settings of the administrator account

Change the user name and password of the administrator account.

3) Press as to select [USER NAME] under [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffEnter the current user name.
6) Press as to select [PASSWORD] under [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffEnter the current password.
9) Press as to select [USER NAME] under [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
174 - ENGLISH
ffEnter a new user name.

ffEnter the current user name if you do not want to change it.
12) Press as to select [PASSWORD] under [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffEnter a new password.
ffEnter the current password if you do not want to change it.
15) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM] under [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed on the [Set up password] page (x page 197) of the web
control screen.
ff The user name and password of a standard user account without administrator rights can be set on the [Set up password] page (x page 197)
of the web control screen.
[NETWORK SECURITY]
Make settings to protect the projector from external attacks via LAN and unauthorized use.
Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for setting the [NETWORK
SECURITY] menu.
[COMMAND PROTECT]
Make settings for the connection authentication when using the command control function.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK SECURITY].

ffThe [NETWORK SECURITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [COMMAND PROTECT] setting.
Connect to the projector in protected mode.

[ENABLE] The user name and password of the administrator account is required for the connection
authentication.
Connect to the projector in non-protected mode.
[DISABLE]
Connection authentication is not performed.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed once the setting is switched.

ffThe [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 175

ffEnter the password of the administrator account.
ffThe [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.
Note
ff When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], connection authentication is not performed, making it vulnerable to threats on the
network. Be aware of the risks before making settings.
ff For details on how to use the command control function, refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 221).
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set the network control of this projector.
Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for using the network function of the
projector.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].

ffThe [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
[WEB CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.

Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI
[COMMAND CONTROL] PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal control command format (x page 228) . Refer to “Control
commands via LAN” (x page 221).
[COMMAND PORT] Set the port number used for command control.
[Crestron Connected(TM)] Set to [ON] to control with Crestron Connected of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.
Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, visit the
[AMX D.D.]
website of AMX Corporation.
URL http://www.amx.com/

Note
[PJLink]
Set the PJLink function to control and monitor the projector using the PJLink protocol.
Setting the password of the administrator account is required (x page 173) for using the PJLink function of the
projector.
Note
[PJLink PASSWORD]
Set the password for security authentication which is required when connecting to the projector.
1) Press as to select [PJLink].

ffThe [PJLink] screen is displayed.
176 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [PJLink PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [PASSWORD] under [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffEnter the current password.
ffThe factory default setting of password is blank.
7) Press as to select [PASSWORD] under [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffEnter a new password.
ffUp to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Note
ff The PJLink password can also be changed on the [Set up password] page (x page 197) of the web control screen.
[PJLink CONTROL]
Set to enable or disable the PJLink protocol control function.

3) Press as to select [PJLink CONTROL].

[ON] Enables PJLink protocol control function.

[OFF] Disables PJLink protocol control function.
[PJLink NOTIFICATION]
Set to enable or disable the PJLink notification function.

3) Press as to select [PJLink NOTIFICATION].
ENGLISH - 177

[OFF] Disables the PJLink notification function.

[ON] Enables the PJLink notification function.
ffIf [ON] is selected, proceed to Step 5).

5) Press as to select [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 1] or [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2].
ffEnter the IP address of the computer to notify the status of the projector.
[Art-Net]
Set the Art-Net function.
Setting the password of the administrator account is required (x page 173) for using the Art-Net function of the
projector.
Note
[Art-Net SETUP]
Make settings to use the Art-Net function.
1) Press as to select [Art-Net].

ffThe [Art-Net] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].

[OFF] Disables the Art-Net function.

[ON(2.X.X.X)] Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 2.X.X.X.
[ON(10.X.X.X)] Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 10.X.X.X.
[ON(MANUAL)] Enables the Art-Net function and uses the IP address set in [WIRED LAN].
ffProceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

ffThe [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select an item, and press qw to switch the setting.
[NET] Enter [NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[SUB NET] Enter [SUB NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[UNIVERSE] Enter [UNIVERSE] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[START ADDRESS] Enter [START ADDRESS] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.

Note
ff If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, IP address is calculated and set automatically.
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]

Set the assignment of the channel.
For the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function, refer to “Using Art-Net
function” (x page 217).
178 - ENGLISH

3) Press as to select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING].

[2] Uses the channel assignment in standard setting.
[USER] Changes the channel assignment.
Uses the channel assignment with DZ21K series compatible.
[1]
DZ21K series: DZ21K series, DS20K series, DW17K series, DZ16K series
ffWhen [2] or [1] is selected, the function assigned to the channel is displayed by pressing the <ENTER>
button.
ffWhen [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 5).
ffThe [CHANNEL SETUP] screen is displayed.
6) Press as to select the channel to set, and press qw to switch the item.
[LIGHT OUTPUT] Adjusts the amount of light.
[INPUT SELECT] Switches the input.
[LENS POSITION] Moves the lens position.
[LENS H SHIFT] Adjusts the lens shift in the horizontal direction.
[LENS V SHIFT] Adjusts the lens shift in the vertical direction.
[LENS FOCUS] Adjusts the focus.
[LENS ZOOM] Adjusts the zoom.
[POWER] Controls the power status.
[SHUTTER] Controls the shutter.
[FADE-IN] Sets the fade-in time.
[FADE-OUT] Sets the fade-out time.
[GEOMETRY] Performs geometric adjustment.
Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.
[CUSTOM MASKING]
To use PC-1, PC-2, and PC-3, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) is required.
[FREEZE] Freezes the projected image.
[COLOR] Adjusts the color saturation.
[TINT] Adjusts the tint.
[RASTER PATTERN] Displays the raster pattern.
[ENABLE/DISABLE] Enables/disables the control of the projector with the Art-Net function.
[NONE] No definition
ffThe setting can be also made by pressing as to select the channel, pressing the <ENTER> button to
display the item list, pressing asqw to select the item, and pressing the <ENTER> button.
ffSame item cannot be set for multiple channels, except for [NONE].
[Art-Net STATUS]
Display the content of control assigned to each channel and the received data of that channel.

3) Press as to select [Art-Net STATUS].

ffThe [Art-Net STATUS] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 179
Chapter 5 Operations
This chapter describes how to use each function.
180 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5 Operations — Network connection
Network connection
The projector is equipped with the network function, and following is possible by connecting to a computer.
ffWeb control
Setting, adjustment, and displaying status of the projector are possible by accessing the projector from a
computer.
Refer to “Web control function” (x page 184) for details.
f Smart Projector Control
f
The application software “Smart Projector Control” can be used, which enables to set and adjust the projector
connected via LAN using a smartphone or tablet.
For details, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
“Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, a software application to monitor and control multiple display devices
(projector or flat panel display) connected to intranet, can be used.
Plug-in software “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals
within an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality,
can also be used.
For details, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
ffPJLink
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the PJLink protocol.
Refer to “Using the PJLink function” (x page 216) for details.
ffArt-Net
Setting of the projector can be operated by the DMX controller or application software using the Art-Net protocol.
Refer to “Using Art-Net function” (x page 217) for details.
ffCommand control
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the control command.
Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 221) for details.
Note
ff Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for using the network function of the projector.
Connecting to the network

This projector can receive the Ethernet signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter via the LAN cable.
Example of a normal network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
Attention
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to use the network function.
ff Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can
be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable (straight
or crossover) automatically.
ENGLISH - 181
ff Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Attention
Note
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication
method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz)
for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN
communication.
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
LINK].
cable transmitter.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL
QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the website (https://
panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic
Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other
manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Setting the projector
1) Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
2) Turn on the power of the projector.
3) Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.
ffThe [NETWORK] screen is displayed.
182 - ENGLISH
4) Press as to select [WIRED LAN], and press the <ENTER> button.

ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
5) Perform the [WIRED LAN] setting.
ffRefer to [WIRED LAN] (x page 172) for details.
Note
ff To connect to an existing network, perform after consulting your network administrator.
rrFactory default setting

ffFollowing setting has been made as a factory default.
[DHCP] OFF
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.0.8
[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] 192.168.0.1
[DNS1]/[DNS2] None
Operating the computer
1) Turn on the power of the computer.
2) Perform the network setting following the instruction of your network administrator.
ffOperation from the computer is possible by configuring the network setting of the computer as follows if the
projector is in the factory default setting.
[IP ADDRESS] 192.168.0.10

[SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] 192.168.0.1
ENGLISH - 183
Chapter 5 Operations — Web control function
Web control function

Following operation is possible from a computer using the web control function.
ffSetting and adjustment of the projector
ffDisplay of the projector status
ffSending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
The projector supports “Crestron Connected”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
can be used.
ffRoomView Express
ffCrestron Fusion
Note
ff Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
ff “Crestron Connected” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems
connected to a network using a computer.
ff For details of the “Crestron Connected”, visit the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only.)
URL https://www.crestron.com/
Download “RoomView Express” from the Crestron Electronics, Inc. website. (English only.)
URL https://www.crestron.com/en-US/resources/get-roomview
Computer that can be used for setting

To use the web control function, a web browser is required. Confirm that the web browser can be used in advance.
OS Compatible browser
Windows Internet Explorer 11.0, Microsoft Edge
Mac OS Safari 10.0/11.0/12.0/13.0
iOS Safari (equipped with version iOS 10, iOS 11, iOS 12, or iOS 13)
Android Google Chrome (equipped with version Android 6.0/7.0/8.0/9.0/10.0)
Accessing from the web browser
1) Start up the web browser on the computer.
2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
ffIf the user name and password of the administator account have been set on the initial setting screen
(x page 69) or on the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] (x page 173) , proceed to
Step 7).
ffThe [Set up password] page is displayed if the administrator account has not been set.
License
3) In [User name], enter the user name of the administrator account.

4) In [Password], enter the password of the administrator account.
ffA password consisting of at least eight single-byte characters is recommended.
ffA password consisting of at least three of the following four character types is recommended.
ggUppercase letters
ggLowercase lettters
ggDigits
ggSymbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
184 - ENGLISH
5) In [Password(Retype)], re-enter the password entered in Step 4).

6) Click [Change].
ffSetting of the administrator account is completed.
7) Enter the user name and password on the displayed login screen.
ffEnter the user name and password of the administrator account, or the user name and password of a
standard user account without administrator rights.
8) Click [OK].
Attention
ff The entry screen for the user name and password may be hidden by other window that is already opened. In such case, minimize the
window in front to display the entry screen.
Note
ff The user name and password of the standard user account can be set on the [Set up password] (x page 197) of the administrator account.
ff If you use a web browser to control the projector, set the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] to [ON].
ff Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple
computers.
ff Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
ff Some items on the projector setting page use the JavaScript function of the web browser. Correct control may not be possible when the web
browser is set not to use this function.
ff If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
ff While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may appear white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.
ff Click [License] on the upper right of the [Set up password] page to display the download page for the Open Source Software license.
ff Screenshot of a computer
The size or the display of the screen may be different from this manual depending on the OS or the Web browser, or the type of computer in
use.
Rights for each account

The administrator account allows use of all functions. There is a limitation in the functions that can be used with
the standard user account. Select the account depending on the purpose.
The function that has l in the administrator / standard user column indicates that it can be operated with their
respective accounts.
Item Function Administrator Standard User Page
[Projector status] l l 187
Error information page l l 188
[Status] [Network status] l l 188
[Access error log] l ― 188
[Mail error log] l ― 188
[Basic control] l l 189
[Projector control]
[Detail control] l ― 190
[Network config] l ― 191
[Adjust clock] l ― 192
[Ping test] l ― 192
[Detailed set up] [Crestron tools] l ― 192
[E-mail set up] l ― 193
[Authentication set up] l ― 194
[Network security] l ― 196
ENGLISH - 185
Item Function Administrator Standard User Page

User name of [Administrator] l ― 197
User name of [User] l ― 198
[Set up password] Password of [Administrator] l ― 197
Password of [User] l l 198, 198
Password of [PJLink] l ― 198
Operation page l ― 199
[Tools] l ― 200
[Crestron Connected(TM)]
[Info] l ― 200
[Help] l ― 201
[License] *1
License downloading page l l 201
*1 Even if you have not set an administrator account, you can download the license from the [Set up password] page that appears when you access
the projector.
Descriptions of items
1 License
7
2
PT-RZ990
3
4
5
6
1 Page tab 5 [Set up password]

Switches pages by clicking this item. The [Set up password] page is displayed by clicking this item.
2 [Status] 6 [Crestron Connected(TM)]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item. The operation page of Crestron Connected is displayed by
3 [Projector control] clicking this item.
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item. 7 [License]
4 [Detailed set up] Click it to go to the page for downloading Open Source Software
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item. licenses.
186 - ENGLISH
[Projector status] page

Click [Status] → [Projector status].
Display the status of the projector for the following items.
1
2 License
3 7
4
PT-RZ990 123456789012
8
9
5 10
6 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1 [PROJECTOR TYPE] 12 [INPUT]
Displays the type of the projector. Displays the status of the selected input.
2 [MAIN VERSION] 13 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the firmware version of the projector. Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
3 [POWER] 14 [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the power. Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
4 [SHUTTER] 15 [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the shutter function ([CLOSE]: Enabled Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the
(closed), [OPEN]: Disabled (open)). projector.
5 [OPERATING MODE] 16 [LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE]
Displays the setting status of [OPERATING MODE]. Displays the temperature status of light source 1.
6 [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] 17 [LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE]
Displays the setting status of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]. Displays the temperature status of light source 2.
7 [SERIAL NUMBER] 18 [LIGHT1]
Displays the serial number of the projector. Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 1.
8 [REMOTE2 STATUS] 19 [LIGHT2]
Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal. Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 2.
9 [OSD] 20 [SELF TEST]
Displays the status of the on-screen display. Displays the self-diagnosis information.
10 [AC VOLTAGE] 21 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Displays the input voltage. Displays the runtime of the projector.
11 [LIGHT OUTPUT]
Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT].
ENGLISH - 187
Error information page

When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display field of the [Projector status]
screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.
ffThe projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.
License License
1
PT-RZ990
1 Display of error information 2 Error code

Displays the alphanumeric symbols and content of errors/
warnings that occur.
Refer to “[SELF TEST] indications” (x page 213) for the
display details.
[Network status] page

Click [Status] → [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
ffClick [Detail] of [RX/TX Packets info] to display the content of send/receive packet.
License
[Access error log] page

Click [Status] → [Access error log].
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with
unauthorized user names or passwords.
License
188 - ENGLISH
[Mail error log] page

Click [Status] → [Mail error log].
E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.
License
Note
ff [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many
accesses/requests are made at once.
ff Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.
ff Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
[Basic control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].
1
License
2
3
4
1 [POWER] 4 [SYSTEM]
Turns off/on the power. Switches the system method.
2 [SHUTTER] 5 On-screen display of the projector
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)). of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the
3 [OSD] menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is
Switches off (hide)/on (display) the on-screen display function. set to off (hide).
6 [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
ENGLISH - 189
[Detail control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].
License
2 6
3 7
8
4
9
5
1 Control of the projector 6 [PROJECTION METHOD]
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same Switches the setting of the projection method.
way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the on- 7 [LENS]
screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is Displays the [LENS] page.
updated.
8 [TEST PATTERN]
2 [SUB MEMORY] Displays the test pattern.
Switches the sub memory. Click the test pattern to display in the projected image from the
3 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] patters displayed on the right side of the control page.
Switches the system daylight view settings. The display of the test pattern disappears if [Exit] is clicked.
4 [FREEZE] 9 [GET OSD]
Temporarily pauses the image. Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the
5 [WAVEFORM MONITOR] control page.
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
[LENS] page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS].
License
1
2
4
5
6
1 [SET POSITION] 4 [FOCUS]

The lens position setting page is displayed. Click qw to adjust the focus.
2 [HOME POSITION] The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down the
Moves the projection lens to the home position. button.
3 [SHIFT] 5 [ZOOM]
Click asqw to adjust the lens shift (vertical position and Click qw to adjust the zoom.
horizontal position). 6 [Back]
The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down the Returns to the [Detail control] page.
button for approximately three seconds or longer.
190 - ENGLISH
Lens position setting page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [SET POSITION].
License
1
2
3
4
1 [Get] 3 [Back]
Acquires the current lens position and displays the acquired Returns to the [LENS] page.
values in the lens position information field. 4 [Apply]
2 Lens position information field Moves to the lens position displayed in the lens position
Enters the lens position (vertical position/horizontal position). information field.
[Network config] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].
ffClick [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
ffClick the [Next] button to display the current settings.
ffClick the [Change] button to display the setting change screen.
License
Network security
Crestron tools
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [PROJECTOR NAME] 6 [DNS1]

Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is Enter the DNS1 server address.
required when using a DHCP server etc. Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address
2 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF] (primary):
To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON]. Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.253)
3 [IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server. 7 [DNS2]
Enter the DNS2 server address.
4 [SUBNET MASK]
Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
(secondary):
5 [DEFAULT GATEWAY] Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP (Example: 192.168.0.254)
server.
8 [Back], [Next]
Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen. Click the
[Next] button to display the setting confirmation screen. Click the
[Submit] button to update the setting.
Note
ff When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click
[Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
ff The connection may be disconnected when the LAN setting is changed while connected with LAN.
ENGLISH - 191
[Adjust clock] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].
License
Network security
Network security
Crestron tools
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Time Zone] 5 [Date]

Select the time zone. Enter the date to be changed.
2 [Set time zone] 6 [Time]
Updates the time zone setting. Enter the time to be changed.
3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]
7 [Set date and time]
Set to [ON] when setting the date and time automatically.
Updates the date and time settings.
4 [NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when
you set to adjust the date and time manually.
(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)
Note
ff The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
[Ping test] page

Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].
License
Network security
Crestron tools
1
3
2
1 [Input IP address] 3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded

Enter the IP address of the server to be tested. 4 Example of display when the connection has failed
2 [Submit]
Executes the connection test.
[Crestron tools] page

Set the information required to connect the Crestron control system to the projector. If you do not have Adobe®
Flash® Player installed on your computer, or if your browser does not support Flash, the [Crestron Connected (TM)]
page will not appear. In that case, set [Control System] on this page.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Crestron tools].
1
2
3
4
1 [IP Address] 3 [Port]

Set the IP address of the control system. Set the port number of the control system.
2 [IPID] 4 [Submit]
Set the IPID of the control system. Update the settings.
192 - ENGLISH
[E-mail set up] page

E-mail can be sent to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses) periodically or when an error or problem has
occurred.
Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].
License
Crestron tools
Network security
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 [ENABLE] 5 [MINIMUM TIME]

Select [ENABLE] to use the E-mail function. Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning
2 [SMTP SERVER NAME] E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the
(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning
set up. temperature.
3 [MAIL FROM] 6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters in Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning
single byte) mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the temperature
exceeds this value.
4 [MEMO]
Enter information such as the location of the projector that
notifies the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single
byte)
License License
Crestron tools Crestron tools
Network security Network security
8 7
7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2] 8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2] Select the conditions to send E-mail.
blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used. [MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached
the value set at the above field.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.
A mail will be sent on the day and time with the check mark.
9 [Submit]
Update the settings.
ENGLISH - 193
[Authentication set up] page

Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].
License
Crestron tools
Network security
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [Auth] 5 [Password]
Select the authentication method specified by your Internet Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
service provider. 6 [SMTP server port]
2 [SMTP Auth] Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected. (Normally 25)
3 [POP server name] 7 [POP server port]
Enter the POP server name. Enter the port number of the POP server.
Allowed characters: (Normally 110)
Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9) 8 [Submit]
Minus sign (-) and period (.) Update the settings.
4 [User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.
194 - ENGLISH
Contents of E-mail sent
Example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set

The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===

Projector Type : PT-RZ990
Serial No : 123456789012
----- E-mail setup data -----

TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 46 degC / 114 degF ]
ERROR [ OFF ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OFF ]
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday [ ON ] Monday [ ON ] Tuesday [ ON ] Wednesday [ ON ]
Thursday [ ON ] Friday [ ON ] Saturday [ ON ]
00:00 [ ON ] 01:00 [ ON ] 02:00 [ ON ] 03:00 [ ON ]

04:00 [ ON ] 05:00 [ ON ] 06:00 [ ON ] 07:00 [ ON ]
08:00 [ ON ] 09:00 [ ON ] 10:00 [ ON ] 11:00 [ ON ]
12:00 [ ON ] 13:00 [ ON ] 14:00 [ ON ] 15:00 [ ON ]
16:00 [ ON ] 17:00 [ ON ] 18:00 [ ON ] 19:00 [ ON ]
20:00 [ ON ] 21:00 [ ON ] 22:00 [ ON ] 23:00 [ ON ]
----- ERROR INFORMATION -----
Error code
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Intake air temperature : 25 degC / 77 degF

Optics module temperature : 28 degC / 82 degF
Exhaust air temperature : 28 degC / 82 degF
Light1 temperature : 28 degC / 82 degF
Light2 temperature : 29 degC / 84 degF
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 7H
POWER ON 132 times
LIGHT1 RUNTIME 7H
LIGHT1 ON 174 times
LIGHT2 RUNTIME 7H
LIGHT2 ON 177 times
-------- Current status ---------

MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LIGHT STATUS LIGHT1=ON LIGHT2=ON
INPUT SDI1
SIGNAL NAME ---
SIGNAL FREQUENCY ---kHz / ---Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0.8
MAC address 12:34:56:78:90:12
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
ENGLISH - 195
Example of the E-mail sent for an error

The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===

Projector Type : PT-RZ990
Serial No : 123456789012
----- ERROR INFORMATION -----

U21 Intake air temp. error
Error code
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00
Intake air temperature : 25degC / 77 degF

Optics module temperature : 28degC / 82 degF
Exhaust air temperature : 28degC / 82 degF
Light1 temperature : 28degC / 82 degF
Light2 temperature : 29degC / 84 degF
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 7H
POWER ON 132 times
LIGHT1 RUNTIME 7H
LIGHT1 ON 174 times
LIGHT2 RUNTIME 7H
LIGHT2 ON 177 times
-------- Current status ---------

MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LIGHT STATUS LIGHT1=ON LIGHT2=ON
INPUT SDI1
SIGNAL NAME ---
SIGNAL FREQUENCY ---kHz / ---Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----

DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0.8
MAC address 12:34:56:78:90:12
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
[Network security] page

Make settings to protect the projector from external attacks via LAN and unauthorized use.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Network security].
1
2
1 [COMMAND PROTECT] 2 [Submit]

Make settings for the connection authentication when using the Updates the setting.
command control function. If you click [Submit] with [DISABLE] selected in [COMMAND
[DISABLE]: Connect to the projector in non-protected mode. PROTECT], a confirmation screen will be displayed. Click [OK]
Connection authentication is not performed. on the confirmation screen to update the settings.
[ENABLE]: Connect to the projector in protected mode.
The user name and password of the administrator account is
required for the connection authentication.
Note
ff When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], connection authentication is not performed, making it vulnerable to threats on the
network. Be aware of the risks before making settings.
ff For details on how to use the command control function, refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 221).
196 - ENGLISH
[Set up password] page (For administrator account)

Click [Set up password].
License
1
2
3
4
1 [Administrator] 3 [PJLink]
Used to change the setting of the administrator account. Used to change the setting of the PJLink account.
2 [User] 4 [Next]
Used to change the setting of the standard user account. Used to change the setting of the password.
[Administrator]
The user name and password of the administrator account can be set.
1
License
1 [Account] 3 [New]
Displays the account to change. [User name]:
2 [Current] Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
[User name]: byte)
Enter the user name before the change. [Password]:
[Password]: Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
Enter the current password. byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [Change]
Determines the change of password.
Note
ff When the projector is already registered in application software (such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” and “Smart Projector
Control”) which uses the communication control via LAN, communication with the projector will become impossible if a user name or
password for [Administrator] is changed. If a user name or password for [Administrator] is changed, update the registration information of the
application software in use.
ENGLISH - 197
[User]
The user name and password of the standard user account can be set.
License
1
1 [Account] 3 [Change]
Displays the account to change. Determines the change of password.
2 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
[PJLink]
The password of the PJLink account can be changed.
1
1 [Account] 3 [Change]
Displays the account to change. Determines the change of password.
2 [New]
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 32 characters in single
byte)
[Set up password] (For standard user account)

The password of the standard user account can be changed.
License
1
2
3
4
1 [Old Password] 3 [Retype]

Enter the current password. Enter the desired new password again.
2 [New Password] 4 [Change]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single Determines the change of password.
byte)
198 - ENGLISH
[Crestron Connected(TM)] page

The projector can be monitored/controlled with Crestron Connected.
It is necessary to access with the administrator account to start the operation screen of Crestron Connected from
the web control screen. (The [Crestron Connected(TM)] button is not displayed in the web control screen with the
standard user account.)
The operation page of Crestron Connected is displayed by clicking [Crestron Connected(TM)].
It is not displayed if Adobe® Flash® Player is not installed on your computer, or the browser you use does not
support Flash. In such a case, click [Back] in the operation page to go back to the previous page.
Note
ff When Microsoft Edge is used for a web browser, the operation of the [Crestron Connected(TM)] page may not be possible depending on
its version. If a web browser freezes when the [Crestron Connected(TM)] button is clicked, use “Windows Update” to install the update
program.
Operation page
2
3
4
1 [Tools], [Info], [Help] 4 [Input Select]

Tabs for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the Controls input selection.
projector. Not available when the power of the projector is turned off.
2 [POWER] 5 Menu screen control buttons
Turns on/off the power. Navigates the menu screen.
3 [SHUTTER] 6 Freeze/image quality adjustment
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: Controls items related to freeze/image quality.
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)). 7 [Back]
Returns to the previous page.
ENGLISH - 199
[Tools] page
Click [Tools] in the operation page.
3
4
1 [Control System] 4 Network status

Set the information required for communicating with the Displays the settings of wired LAN.
controller to be connected with the projector. [DHCP]
2 [User Password] Displays the current setting.
Set the user rights password for the operation page of Crestron [Ip Address]
Connected. Displays the current setting.
[Subnet Mask]
3 [Admin Password]
Displays the current setting.
Set the administrator rights password for the operation page of
[Default Gateway]
Crestron Connected.
[DNS Server]
5 [Exit]
Returns to the operation page.
[Info] page
Click [Info] in the operation page.
1 4
5
2
3
6
1 [Projector Name] 5 [Source]

Displays the projector name. Displays the selected input.
2 [Mac Address] 6 [Error Status]
Displays the MAC address. Displays the error status.
3 [Lamp1 Hours], [Lamp2 Hours] 7 [Exit]
Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2. Returns to the operation page.
4 [Power Status]
Displays the status of the power.
200 - ENGLISH
[Help] page
Click [Help] in the operation page.
The [Help Desk] window is displayed.
1 [Help Desk]
A message can be sent/received with the administrator using the
Crestron Connected.
License downloading page
1 [Download]
Click it to download the Open Source Software license used
in the projector. Please specify the destination for saving the
licenses and download.
Note
ff The licenses are in text format and saved as a zipped file in the firmware of the projector.
File name: Lisence.zip
ENGLISH - 201
Chapter 5 Operations — Updating the firmware
Updating the firmware

The firmware of the projector can be updated via LAN.
Check the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/) for availability of the firmware that can be updated.
Customer can update the firmware if a newer version than the current firmware version is published.
It is necessary to register and log in to PASS*1 to confirm the availability of the firmware that can be updated or to
download the firmware.
*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website
For details, visit the website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/).
rrFirmware that can be updated

Main version
rrHow to confirm the firmware version

Current firmware version can be confirmed by pressing the <STATUS> button on the remote control and displaying
the [STATUS] screen.
The firmware version can also be confirmed in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS].
STATUS 1/5
PROJECTOR TYPE PT-RZ990
SERIAL NUMBER 123456789012
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 10000h
LIGHT RUNTIME 10000h / 10000h
CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME 1h 23m

Main version
MAIN/SUB VERSION 1.00 / 1.00
INTAKE AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
OPTICS MODULE TEMP. 27°C/80°F
EXHAUST AIR TEMP. 31°C/87°F
SELF TEST NO ERRORS
ENTER SEND E-MAIL

CHANGE MENU EXIT
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.
Updating the firmware via LAN
Example of network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
Attention
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.
ff Connect a LAN cable to the <LAN> terminal or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
ff To connect to the network using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To connect to the network using the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or
[LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
202 - ENGLISH
cable transmitter.
ff Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher for the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal. Either the
straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The
projector will determine the type of the cable (straight or crossover) automatically.
ff Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter as the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal.
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is normally 100 m (328'1"). It is possible to
transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method.
Computer used for updating the firmware

Prepare a computer compatible with the following OS equipped with a LAN terminal.
ffMicrosoft Windows 10
Windows 10 Pro 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 10 32 bit/64 bit
f Microsoft Windows 8.1
f
Windows 8.1 Pro 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 8.1 32 bit/64 bit
Note
ff The operation is not guaranteed when used in an environment outside the conditions described in this section, or when a home-made
computer is used.
ff This does not guarantee the operation on all computers even if it is used in the environment fulfilling the conditions described in this section.
ff Connection with the projector or the data transfer of the firmware may fail in following cases. If it has failed, change the software setting or
change the [Power Options] setting in Windows OS, and try the update again.
gg When security software such as firewall or the utility software for the LAN adapter is installed
gg When other software has started up or operating
gg When the computer has gone into sleep/pause status
Acquiring the firmware

Download the firmware update tool for this projector (compressed file in zip format) from the website (https://
panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/).
ffFile name (example): FirmUpdateTool_RZ990_101.zip
(Update tool for the PT‑RZ990 with main version 1.01)
Confirming the setting of the projector

Confirm the setting of the projector to be updated in advance.
ffWhether the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is already set to [NORMAL]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS]
gg[DHCP]
gg[IP ADDRESS]
gg[SUBNET MASK]
gg[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
ffUser name and password of the administrator account
Confirming the computer setting

Confirm the network setting of the computer to be used for update, and make it possible to connect with the
projector to be updated via network.
ENGLISH - 203
Updating the firmware
1) Extract the compressed file downloaded from the website.

ffThe firmware update tool (executable file in exe format) is generated.
File name (example): FirmUpdateTool_RZ990_101.exe
2) Double-click the executable file generated by extracting.
ffThe update tool is started up, and the confirmation screen is displayed.
3) Confirm the status of the projector.

ffConfirm that the projector to be updated is in the standby mode.
4) Confirm the connection status.
ffConfirm that the projector to be updated and the computer to be used for update are correctly connected to
LAN.
5) Click [Next].
ffThe license agreement screen is displayed.
ffConfirm the content of the license agreement.
ffThe update tool will end by clicking [Close].

6) Select [I accept].
204 - ENGLISH
7) Click [Next].
ffThe connection setting screen is displayed.
1.01
8) Enter the setting details of the projector.

ffEnter the details set in the projector to be updated.
Item Details
[IP Address] The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS] → [IP ADDRESS]
[Command Port] The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]
[User Name] The user name of the administrator account
[Password] The password of the administrator account
9) Click [Next].
ffThe update confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Click [Start].

ffUpdate is started.
ffThe light source indicator <LIGHT1> and the light source indicator <LIGHT2> on the projector blink red
alternately while updating.
f Elapsed time and rough progress can be confirmed in the update status display screen. The required time
f
is approximately 20 minutes.
ENGLISH - 205
11) Confirm the completion of the update.

ffOnce the update is completed, the completion confirmation screen is displayed.
ffTo continue to update the firmware of another projector, click [Yes]. The connection setting screen in Step 7)
is displayed.
ffTo end the update tool, click [No].
12) Confirm the firmware version.
ffTurn on the power of the projector and confirm the firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.
Attention
ff Do not disconnect the main power of the projector or disconnect the LAN cable while updating.
Note
ff In following cases, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update from the beginning.
gg When the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed
gg When the power of the projector or the computer has turned off due to power outage, etc., during the update
206 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance
This chapter describes inspection methods when there are problems, and maintenance methods.
ENGLISH - 207
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Light source/temperature indicators
Light source/temperature indicators

When an indicator lights up
If a problem occurs inside the projector, the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> or temperature indicator
<TEMP> will inform you by lighting or blinking. Check the status of the indicators and take following measures.
Attention
ff When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 72).
Light source indicator <LIGHT1>
Light source indicator <LIGHT2>
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2>
Indicator status Status Solution

ff Turn off the power and mount the projection lens again. (x page 50)
The light source on one side is turned
Blinking red ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 72) , and turn on
off since the projection lens cannot be
(1 time) the power again. The light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> may not
detected.
light up or blink.
Some of the elements of the light
Blinking red
source are defective and the light output
(2 times) ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 72) , and turn on
has decreased.
the power again. The light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> may not
The light source does not light up, or the light up or blink.
Blinking red
light source turns off while the projector
(3 times)
is in use.
Note
ff If the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> are still lit or blinking after taking the measures, set the <MAIN POWER> switch to
<OFF>, and ask your dealer for repairs.
ff The light source indicator corresponding to the light source being lit will light up green if the projector is in projection mode and there is no
indication of problem by lighting or blinking red.
ff The function to detect the projector lens may or may not exist depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
208 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Light source/temperature indicators
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Blinking red Blinking red

Indicator status Lighting red
(2 times) (3 times)
Internal temperature is high Internal temperature is high
Status Warm-up status The cooling fan has stopped.
(warning). (standby status).
ff Did you turn on the power
ff Is the intake/exhaust vent blocked?
Cause when the temperature was ―
f Is the room temperature high?
low (around 0 °C (32 °F))? f
ff Wait at least five minutes ff Remove any objects that are blocking the intake/exhaust
in the current status. vent. ff Turn the <MAIN POWER>
ff Use the projector f Use the projector in an appropriate operating
f switch to <OFF>
Solution
in an appropriate environment temperature*1. (x page 72) , and
operating environment ff Do not use the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m consult your dealer.
temperature*1. (13 780') or higher above sea level.
*1 For details of operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment temperature” (x page 239) .
Note
ff If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
ENGLISH - 209
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Maintenance
Maintenance
Before maintaining the projector
ffMake sure to turn off the power before performing the maintenance of the projector. (x pages 58, 72)
ffWhen switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”
(x page 72).
Maintenance
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
ffIf the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with
a dry cloth.
ffDo not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may
deteriorate the outer case.
ffWhen using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
Lens front surface

Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
ffDo not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
ffSince the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
ff The lens may become damaged by hitting with a hard object or by wiping the front surface of the lens with excessive force. Handle with
care.
Note
ff Dust may accumulate around the intake/exhaust vent depending on the environment and operating condition when used in an environment
with excessive dust. This may adversely affect the ventilation, cooling, and heat dissipation inside the projector, thus causing reduced
brightness.
210 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems Points to be checked Page

ff Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet? ―
ff Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>? 72
ff Is the wall outlet supplying electricity? ―
Power does not turn on.
ff Have the circuit breakers tripped? ―
ff Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> blinking? 208
ff Is the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit or blinking? 209
ff Are connections to external devices correctly performed? 52
ff Is the input selection setting correct? 73
ff Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum? 88
No image appears. ff Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly? ―
ff Is the shutter function in use? 79, 127
ff Is the projection lens attached correctly? 51
ff Is the lens cover still attached to the lens? 60
ff Is the lens focus set correctly? 74
ff Is the projection distance appropriate? 40
Image is fuzzy.
ff Is the lens dirty? 28
ff Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen? ―
ff Is the [CONTRAST] adjustment setting at a minimum? 88
ff Is the setting value of [LIGHT OUTPUT] set small? 140
Image is dark
ff Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> blinking?
208
It may improve by reattaching the projection lens.
ff Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly? 89
Color is pale or grayish. ff Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly? ―
ff Is the computer cable damaged? ―
ff Are the batteries depleted? ―
ff Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly? 36
ff Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control signal
32
receiver of the projector?
Remote control does not ff Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range? 32
respond. ff Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection? 32
ff Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
167
[DISABLE]?
ff Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 229
ff Is the ID number setting operation correct? 81
Menu screen does not
ff Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)? 79
appear.
Buttons on the control ff Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to [DISABLE]? 167
panel do not operate. ff Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 229
ff Is [SYSTEM SELECTOR] set properly? 94
Image does not display ff Is [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] set correctly? 116
correctly. ff Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources? ―
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 231
ff Is the cable too long? (For D‑Sub cables, the cable length should be 10 m (32'10")
―
or shorter.)
Image from a computer ff Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external
does not appear. output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” keys or the “Fn” + “F10”
―
keys simultaneously. This will differ depending on the model of the computer. Refer
to the user manual provided with your computer.)
ENGLISH - 211
Chapter 6 Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Problems Points to be checked Page

ff Is [EDID SELECT] in [DVI-D IN] set to [EDID3] or [EDID2:PC]? 118
Image output from DVI‑D ff It may improve by updating the graphic accelerator driver of the computer to the
―
of the computer does not latest version.
appear.
ff It may improve by performing the [EDID SELECT] setting in [DVI-D IN], and then
118
rebooting the computer.
Video from HDMI ff Is the HDMI cable connected securely? 52
compatible device does
ff Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on. ―
not appear or it appears
jumbled. ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 231
Lens shift cannot be ff Perform [LENS CALIBRATION]. 132

adjusted. ff Is the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET‑DLE055) attached? ―
ff Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
―
Cannot control the device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
projector with Art-Net. ff Is [Art-Net SETUP] set to other than [OFF]? 178
ff Are [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], and [START ADDRESS] set correctly? 178
ff Is the cable compatible to the condition of the projector used? 54
ff Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
―
The DIGITAL LINK input device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
image is not displayed. ff Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO], [DIGITAL LINK], or [LONG REACH]? Is it
170
set to [ETHERNET]?
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input? ―
Attention
ff If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
212 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6 Maintenance — [SELF TEST] indications
[SELF TEST] indications

[SELF TEST] can be checked in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] → [SELF TEST].
The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol that is displayed when an error or a warning has occurred and
its details. Confirm “Action number”, and follow the measure in “Measure for error and warning” (x page 214).
The input supply voltage is displayed only with the numeric value.
Error/warning display Details Action number

U11 Intake temperature warning 1
U12 Optical module temperature warning 1
U13 Exhaust air temperature warning 1
U14 Low temperature warning 2
U16 Light source 1 temperature warning 1
U17 Light source 2 temperature warning 1
U21 Intake temperature error 1
U22 Optical module temperature error 1
U23 Exhaust air temperature error 1
U24 Low temperature error 2
U25 Light source 1 temperature error 1
U26 Light source 2 temperature error 1
U81 Low AC voltage warning (below 90 V) 3
H01 Battery replacement for the internal clock 4
H11 Intake air temperature sensor error 5
H12 Optical module temperature sensor error 5
H13 Exhaust air temperature sensor error 5
H14 Light source 1 temperature sensor error 5
H15 Light source 2 temperature sensor error 5
F00 Liquid cooling pump 1 warning 5
F01 Liquid cooling pump 2 warning 5
F15 Luminance sensor error 5
F16 Angle sensor error 5
F18 Air pressure sensor error 5
F50 Radiator fan 3 warning 5
F51 Phosphor wheel 1 fan warning *1 5
F52 Phosphor wheel 2 fan warning *1 5
F53 Power supply fan warning 5
F54 LD driver fan warning 5
F55 Exhaust fan 3 warning 5
F56 DMD fan warning 5
F61 Light source 1 driver communication error 5
F62 Light source 2 driver communication error 5
F85 Color wheel error (FM) 5
F86 Color wheel error (FPGA) 5
F96 Lens mounter error 5
FA8 Light source 1 error 5
FC8 Light source 2 error 5
FE1 Radiator fan 3 error 5
FE2 Phosphor wheel 1 fan error *1 5
FE3 Phosphor wheel 2 fan error *1
5
FE4 Power supply fan error 5
FE5 LD driver fan error 5
FE6 Exhaust fan 3 error 5
FE7 DMD fan error 5
ENGLISH - 213
Chapter 6 Maintenance — [SELF TEST] indications
Error/warning display Details Action number

FF0 Radiator fan 2 error 5
FF1 Radiator fan 1 error 5
FH0 5
Phosphor wheel 1 error
FH1 5
FH2 5
Phosphor wheel 2 error
FH3 5
FJ0 Liquid cooling pump 1 error 5
FJ1 Liquid cooling pump 2 error 5
FL1 Light source 1 unit error 6
FL2 Light source 2 unit error 6
*1 Not available for PT-RZ690
Note
ff The self-diagnosis display and the details of the malfunction may be different.
ff For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.
rrMeasure for error and warning
Action
Measure
number
1 The operating environment temperature is too high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
2 The operating environment temperature is too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
3 The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.
4 Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
5 If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer.
The light source has failed to turn on. If the light source does not light up after turning the power off and on, consult your
6
dealer.
*1 For details of operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment temperature” (x page 239).
214 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix
This chapter describes specifications and after-sales service for the projector.
ENGLISH - 215
Chapter 7 Appendix — Technical information
Technical information
Using the PJLink function
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1 and class 2, and setting of the projector or
querying of the projector status can be performed from the computer using the PJLink protocol.
Note
ff Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for using the PJLink function of the projector.
PJLink commands
The following table lists the PJLink commands supported by the projector.
ffx characters in tables are non-specific characters.
Parameter/response
Class Command Control details Remark
string
0 Standby
1 POWR Power supply control
1 Power on
0 Standby
Power supply status
1 POWR ? 1 Power on
query
2 Preparing for switching off the projector
11 RGB1
INPT Input selection
12 RGB2
INPT ? Input selection query 31 DVI‑D
1, 2
32 HDMI
33 DIGITAL LINK
34 SDI
AVMT Shutter control 30 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open)
1
AVMT ? Shutter status query 31 Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed)
Indicates fan errors, and ff 0 = No error is
1st byte
returns 0 - 2. detected
Indicates light source errors, ff 1 = Warning
2nd byte
and returns 0 or 2. ff 2 = Error
Indicates temperature errors,
1 ERST ? Error status query xxxxxx 3rd byte
and returns 0 - 2.
4th byte Returns 0.
5th byte Returns 0.
Indicates other errors, and
6th byte
returns 0 - 2.
AAAA: Light source 1 runtime
Light source status X: 0 = Light source 1 off, 1 = Light source 1 on
1 LAMP ? AAAA X BBBB Y
query BBBB: Light source 2 runtime
Y: 0 = Light source 2 off, 1 = Light source 2 on
Input selection list
1, 2 INST ? 11 12 31 32 33 34 ―
query
Returns the name set in the [NETWORK] menu → [PROJECTOR
1 NAME ? Projector name query xxxxx
NAME].
Manufacturer name
1 INF1 ? Panasonic Returns manufacturer name.
query
PT‑RZ990 / PT‑RZ890 /
1 INF2 ? Model name query Returns model name.
PT‑RZ790 / PT‑RZ690
Other information
1 INF0 ? xxxxx Returns information such as version number.
queries
1 CLSS ? Class information query 2 Returns class for PJLink.
2 SNUM ? Serial number query xxxxxxxxx Returns serial number.
2 SVER ? Software version query xxxxxxxxx Returns version number.
216 - ENGLISH
Parameter/response
Class Command Control details Remark
string
11 / RGB1
12 / RGB2
Input terminal name 31 / DVI‑D
2 INNM ? Returns input terminal name.
query 32 / HDMI
33 / DIGITAL LINK
34 / SDI
Input signal resolution AAAA: Horizontal resolution
2 IRES ? AAAAxBBBB
query BBBB: Vertical resolution
Recommended
2 RRES ? 1920 x 1200 Returns display resolution.
resolution query
FREZ Freeze control 0 Freeze clear
2
FREZ ? Freeze status query 1 Freeze (stop)
Cooling notification 0 Notifies when the power is turned off.
2 POWR
Warmup notification 1 Notifies when the power is turned on.
2 ERST Error notification xxxxxx Notifies when an error occurs.
Notifies the MAC address when the PJLink communication
2 LKUP Link up notification xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
becomes possible.
11 RGB1
12 RGB2
Input switch completion 31 DVI‑D
2 INPT
notification 32 HDMI
33 DIGITAL LINK
34 SDI
The projector connected to the same network that can
2 SRCH Projector search ACKN=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
communicate with PJLink will respond with its MAC address.
PJLink security authentication

A PJLink password for security authentication is required for PJLink command communication.
The PJLink password can be set from the [NETWORK] menu → [PJLink] → [PJLink PASSWORD] (x page 176)
or from the [Set up password] page (x page 197) of the web control screen.
When using the PJLink commands without security authentication, set the PJLink password to blank. The factory
default setting of PJLink password is blank.
ffFor specifications related to PJLink, visit the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Using Art-Net function

Since the network function of the projector supports the Art-Net function, you can control the projector settings
with the DMX controller and application software using the Art-Net protocol.
Note
ff Setting the password of the administrator account (x page 173) is required for using the Art-Net function of the projector.
Channel definition
The following table lists the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function.
Channel settings can be switched using the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
(x page 178).
The control details assigned to each channel are listed in the following table.
ffChannel assignment for [USER] is in factory default setting. Assignment can be changed.
Control details
Channel
[2] [USER] [1]
CHANNEL1 LIGHT OUTPUT LIGHT OUTPUT SHUTTER
CHANNEL2 INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT
CHANNEL3 LENS POSITION LENS POSITION LENS FUNCTION SELECT
CHANNEL4 LENS H SHIFT LENS H SHIFT LENS CONTROL
ENGLISH - 217
Control details
Channel
[2] [USER] [1]
CHANNEL5 LENS V SHIFT LENS V SHIFT POWER
CHANNEL6 LENS FOCUS LENS FOCUS LIGHT OUTPUT
CHANNEL7 LENS ZOOM LENS ZOOM ENABLE/DISABLE
CHANNEL8 POWER POWER FADE-IN
CHANNEL9 GEOMETRY GEOMETRY FADE-OUT
CHANNEL10 CUSTOM MASKING CUSTOM MASKING CUSTOM MASKING
CHANNEL11 ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE GEOMETRY
CHANNEL12 NONE NONE NONE
Control details
rrLIGHT OUTPUT
This can be set in 256 steps between 100 % and 0 %.
Performance Parameter Default value

100 % 0
… … 0
0 % 255
rrINPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])

No operation 0‑7
RGB1 8‑15
RGB2 16‑23
No operation 24‑31
DVI‑D 32‑39 0
HDMI 40‑47
DIGITAL LINK 48‑55
SDI 56‑63
rrINPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [2] or [USER])

No operation 0‑7
RGB1 8‑15
RGB2 16‑23
DVI‑D 24‑31
0
HDMI 32‑39
DIGITAL LINK 40‑47
SDI 48‑55
rrLENS POSITION

No operation 0‑31
Move to the home position 32‑63 0
218 - ENGLISH
rrLENS H SHIFT, LENS V SHIFT, LENS FOCUS, LENS ZOOM

(-) High speed 0‑31
Lens adjustment (-) Low speed 32‑63
(-) Fine adjustment 64‑95
Operation stop 96‑159 128
(+) Fine adjustment 160‑191
Lens adjustment (+) Low speed 192‑223
(+) High speed 224‑255
rrLENS FUNCTION SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])

Operate together with LENS CONTROL.

No operation 0‑15
LENS H SHIFT 16‑31
LENS V SHIFT 32‑47
LENS FOCUS 48‑63 0
LENS ZOOM 64‑79
Move to the home position 80‑95
rrLENS CONTROL (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])

Operate together with LENS FUNCTION SELECT.

(-) High speed 0‑31
Lens adjustment (-) Low speed 32‑63
(-) Fine adjustment 64‑95
Operation stop 96‑127
100
(+) Fine adjustment 128‑159
Lens adjustment (+) Low speed 160‑191
(+) High speed 192‑223
Execute command action 224‑255
rrPOWER

Standby 0‑63
No operation 64‑191 128
Power on 192‑255
rrSHUTTER

SHUTTER: Open 0‑63
SHUTTER: Closed 192‑255
ENGLISH - 219
rrFADE-IN, FADE-OUT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1] or [USER])

Operate together with SHUTTER.

OFF 0‑15
0.5s 16‑31
1.0s 32‑47
1.5s 48‑63
2.0s 64‑79
2.5s 80‑95
3.0s 96‑111 255
3.5s 112‑127
4.0s 128‑143
5.0s 144‑159
7.0s 160‑175
10.0s 176‑191
rrGEOMETRY

OFF 0‑15
KEYSTONE 16‑31
CURVED CORRECTION 32‑47
PC-1 48‑63
255
PC-2 64‑79
PC-3 80‑95
CORNER CORRECTION 96‑111
rrCUSTOM MASKING
To use PC-1, PC-2, or PC-3, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) is required.

OFF 0‑31
PC-1 32‑63
PC-2 64‑95 255
PC-3 96‑127
rrFREEZE

No operation 0‑31
OFF 32‑95
ON 160‑223
220 - ENGLISH
rrCOLOR, TINT

No operation 0‑31
Factory default setting 32‑63
-31 64‑65
… …
0
0 128‑129
… …
+31 190‑191
rrRASTER PATTERN

No operation 0‑15
OFF 16‑31
WHITE 32‑47
YELLOW 48‑63
CYAN 64‑79
GREEN 80‑95
0
MAGENTA 96‑111
RED 112‑127
BLUE 128‑143
BLACK 144‑159
USER LOGO 160‑175
rrENABLE/DISABLE
Operation for all channels is not accepted when set to “Disable”.

Disable 0‑127
0
Enable 128‑255
Note
ff If the projector is operated using the remote control or the control panel, or by the control command while controlling the projector using the
Art-Net function, the setting of the DMX controller or computer application may be different from the projector status. To reflect the controls
of all channels to the projector, set “ENABLE/DISABLE” of channel 11 to “Disable” and then back to “Enable”.
ff To create and register the USER LOGO image, use “Logo Transfer Software”.
Control commands via LAN

The projector can be controlled via the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal or the <LAN> terminal by using the control
command format via the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal.
For examples of the available commands, refer to “Control command” (x page 228).
Note
ff Setting the password of the administrator account is required for (x page 173) sending and receiving the commands via LAN.
When connecting in protected mode
Connecting
This is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND
PROTECT] is set to [ENABLE].
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
ENGLISH - 221
IP address Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].

Port number Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
Termination
Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section
symbol
Command “NTCONTROL” ‘’ ‘1’ ‘’ “zzzzzzzz” (CR)
example (ASCII string) 0x20 0x31 0x20 (ASCII code hex number) 0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte
ffMode: 1 = Protect mode

ffExample: Response during protect mode (random number section is undefined value)
“NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)
3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
ff“xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx User name of the administrator account

yyyyy Password of the administrator account
zzzzzzzz 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
Command Hash value ‘0’ ‘0’ Control command (CR)
example “Connecting” (x page 221) 0x30 0x30 (ASCII string) 0x0d
Data length 32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from the
administrator account user name and password, and the acquired random number)
“dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR)
rrReceived data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
Command ‘0’ ‘0’ Control command (CR)
example 0x30 0x30 (ASCII string) 0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte
ffExample: The projector is powered on

“00001” (CR)
rrError response
Termination
String Details
symbol
“ERR1” Undefined control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period (CR)
Message
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period 0x0d
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes ― 1 byte
222 - ENGLISH
Note
ff The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based
on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,
execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server
and client” (x page 224).
When connecting in non-protected mode
Connecting
This is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND
PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE].
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].

Port number Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
Termination
Data section Blank Mode
symbol
Command “NTCONTROL” ‘’ ‘0’ (CR)
example (ASCII string) 0x20 0x30 0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
ffMode: 0 = non-protect mode

ffExample: Response during non-protect mode
“NTCONTROL 0” (CR)
Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command

“00QPW” (CR)
rrReceived data
Termination
Header Data section
symbol
ffExample: The power of the projector is in standby status

“00000” (CR)
ENGLISH - 223
rrError response
Termination
String Details
symbol
“ERR1” Undefined control command
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
(CR)
Message “ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
0x0d
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
Data length 4 bytes ― 1 byte
Note
ff The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based
on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,
execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server
and client” (x page 224).
Communication flow between server and client

To send/receive a command via LAN, refer to the communication flow indicated below.
Server: Projector
Client: Control device such as a computer
Client Server
Connection request
Sending of key
Sending of command 1
Session 1
Responding to command 1
Disconnection
Connection request
Sending of key
Sending of command 2
Session 2
Responding to command 2
Disconnection
224 - ENGLISH
<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC

OUT> terminals
The <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals of the
projector conform with RS‑232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer.
A combined screen with a balanced contrast can be displayed by linking multiple projectors using the <SERIAL/
MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal, and
sharing the brightness level of the video signal input to each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by
combining the projected images from multiple projectors. It is also possible to synchronize the shutter operation of
the specified projector to other projectors.
For the connection method of the projectors when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter
synchronization function, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter
synchronization function” (x page 55).
Connection for RS‑232C communication

Single projector
Projector connecting terminals
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male) Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
Multiple projectors
Connecting terminals on projector 1 Connecting terminals on projector 2
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)

Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female)
Communication cable (straight) Communication cable (straight)
When connecting using DIGITAL LINK compatible device

Projector connecting terminals DIGITAL LINK compatible device
Computer
DIGITAL LINK DIGITAL LINK D-Sub 9p (female)
D-Sub 9p (male)
LAN cable (straight) Communication cable (straight)
Note
ff The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 154) must be set according to the connection method.
ff To control the projector with standby mode when connecting utilizing the DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [STANDBY MODE] to [NORMAL].
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.
ENGLISH - 225
Pin assignments and signal names
D‑Sub 9-pin (female)

Pin No. Signal name Details
Outside view
(1) ― NC
(2) TXD Transmitted data
(5) (1) (3) RXD Received data
MULTI PROJECTOR For contrast synchronization function/for
(4)
SYNC shutter synchronization function
(5) GND Earth
(6) ― NC
(9) (6) (7) CTS

Connected internally
(8) RTS
(9) ― NC
D‑Sub 9-pin (male)

Pin No. Signal name Details
Outside view
(1) ― NC
(2) RXD Received data
(1) (5) (3) TXD Transmitted data
MULTI PROJECTOR For contrast synchronization function/for
(4)
SYNC shutter synchronization function
(5) GND Earth
(6) ― NC
(6) (9) (7) RTS

Connected internally
(8) CTS
(9) ― NC
RS‑232C communication conditions (factory default)
Signal level RS‑232C-compliant

Sync. method Asynchronous
Baud rate 9 600 bps
Parity None
Character length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
X parameter None
S parameter None
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
ID designate
ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z
(2 bytes)
End (1 byte)
Parameter (undefined length)
Colon (1 byte)
3 command characters (3 bytes)
Semi-colon (1 byte)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Start (1 byte)
226 - ENGLISH
Basic format (has subcommands)
Same as the basic format
Sub command (5 bytes) Parameter (6 bytes)*1

Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5
bytes)
Operation (1 byte)*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.
Attention
ff If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try
sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
ff When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before
sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
ff If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff ID transmission in RS‑232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
ff If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.
gg It matches the projector ID
gg ID is designated as ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON]
gg ID is designated as GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON]
ff STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
When multiple projectors are controlled
When multiple projectors are all controlled

When controlling multiple projectors together using RS‑232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit

When controlling multiple projectors by group unit using RS‑232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
Note
ff Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors.
ff When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.
Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors of the same group.
ff When using the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, control by RS‑232C is not possible since multiple
projectors are daisy chain connected in a loop.
ENGLISH - 227
Cable specification
When connected to a computer When multiple projectors are connected
1 NC NC 1 1 NC NC 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
Projector Computer Projector 1 Projector 2
4 4 4 4
(<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR (DTE specifications) (<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR (<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR
5 5 5 5
SYNC IN> terminal) SYNC OUT> terminal) SYNC IN> terminal)
6 NC NC 6 6 NC NC 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 NC NC 9 9 NC NC 9
Note
ff A cable with pin (4) connected to each other such as full wired straight cable is required as the cable when using the contrast synchronization
function or the shutter synchronization function. Also, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] when using the
contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function.
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
rrProjector control command
Parameter/response
Command Details Remark (parameter)
string
PON Power on
― To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
POF Power standby
000 STANDBY
QPW Power query
001 Power on
RG1 RGB1
RG2 RGB2
Switching the input DVI DVI‑D
IIS
signal HD1 HDMI
DL1 DIGITAL LINK
SD1 SDI
OSH Shutter control 0 OPEN
QSH Shutter status query 1 CLOSE
0 DEFAULT/AUTO
1 4:3
VSE Aspect ratio switch
2 16:9
5 THROUGH
6 HV FIT
Aspect ratio settings
QSE 9 H FIT
query
10 V FIT
OCS Sub memory switch
Sub memory status 01 - 96 Sub memory number
QSB
query
rrLens control command
Command Sub command Details Remark

VXX LNSI2 Lens H shift
VXX LNSI3 Lens V shift +00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1-, +00100
= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2-, +00200 = Coarse
VXX LNSI4 Lens focus adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment-
VXX LNSI5 Lens zoom
228 - ENGLISH
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

It is possible to control the projector remotely (by contact control) from a control board located away from the
projector where remote control signals cannot reach.
Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control board.
Remote control Contact control
Remote control/contact control
Standby Lit
Light source
RGB1 DIGITAL LINK
RGB2 HDMI
DVI-D
Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc. Remote control board in another location
Pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Open (H) Short (L)
(1) GND ― GND
(2) POWER OFF ON
(5) (1) (3) RGB1 Other RGB1
(4) RGB2 Other RGB2
(5) DIGITAL LINK Other DIGITAL LINK
(6) HDMI Other HDMI
(7) DVI‑D Other DVI‑D
(9) (6) (8) SHUTTER OFF ON
Controlled by remote Controlled by external
(9) RST/SET
control contact
Attention
ff When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for
RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
gg Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <SHUTTER> button
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the
control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also
disabled.
gg Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <RGB1/2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI> button,
<DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button, <SHUTTER> button
Note
ff To change the settings of pins (2) to (8), set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. (x page 156)
ENGLISH - 229
<RGB 2 IN> terminal
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(1) R/PR (9) ―
(2) G/Y (10) GND
(11) (15)
(3) B/PB (11) GND
(4) ― (12) DDC data
(6) (10)
(5) GND (13) SYNC/HD
(6) GND (14) VD
(1) (5)
(7) GND (15) DDC clock
(8) GND
Upgrade Kit
If the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑UK20) is applied, the following functions are extended.
Function Standard status When the Upgrade Kit is applied

Adjustment range of Maximum of ±40° *1
Maximum of ±45°*1
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
Adjustment range of Maximum of ±15°*1 Maximum of ±40°*1
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
Adjustment range of Vertical arc, Maximum ±50*1 Vertical arc, Maximum ±100*1
[CURVED CORRECTION] Horizontal arc, Maximum ±50*1 Horizontal arc, Maximum ±100*1
[CUSTOM MASKING] Cannot be used. The image is masked in optional form.
[PC CORRECTION] for Cannot be used. Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the
[UNIFORMITY] entire screen.
*1 The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range” (x page 42) for the possible projection range.
230 - ENGLISH
List of compatible signals

The following table specifies the video signals compatible with the projector. For details of SDI signal, refer to “List
of SDI compatible signals” (x page 236).
This projector supports the signal with l in the compatible signal column.
ffThe content of the compatible signal column is as follows.
ggRGB: RGB1 input, RGB2 input
ggDVI‑D: DVI‑D input
ggHDMI: HDMI input
ggDL: DIGITAL LINK input
Scanning freq. Compatible signal

Signal name Resolution Dot clock freq.
(SIGNAL FORMAT) (Dots) Horizontal Vertical (MHz) RGB DVI‑D HDMI DL
(kHz) (Hz)
480/60i 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5 l ― ― ―
576/50i 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5 l ― ― ―
720
480/60i 15.7 59.9 27.0 ― l l l
(1 440) x 480i*1
720
576/50i 15.6 50.0 27.0 ― l l l
(1 440) x 576i*1
480/60p 720 x 480 31.5 59.9 27.0 l l l l
576/50p 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0 l l l l
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 *2
74.3 l l l l
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 l l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0*2 74.3 l l l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 l l l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0*2 74.3 l l l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 *2
74.3 l l l l
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 l l l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0*2 74.3 l l l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0*2 148.5 l l l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 l l l l
3840 x 2160/24p 3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0 *2
297.0 ― ― l l
3840 x 2160/25p 3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 ― ― l l
3840 x 2160/30p 3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0 *2
297.0 ― ― l l
3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 297.0 ― ― l*3 l*3
3840 x 2160/60p
3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 594.0 ― ― l ―
3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 297.0 ― ― l *3
l*3
3840 x 2160/50p
3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 ― ― l ―
4096 x 2160/24p 4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0 *2
297.0 ― ― l l
4096 x 2160/25p 4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 ― ― l l
4096 x 2160/30p 4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0*2 297.0 ― ― l l
4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 297.0 ― ― l*3 l*3
4096 x 2160/60p
4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 594.0 ― ― l ―
4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 297.0 ― ― l *3
l*3
4096 x 2160/50p
4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 ― ― l ―
640 x 400/70 640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2 l l l l
640 x 400/85 640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5 l l l l
640 x 480/60 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 l l l l
640 x 480/67 640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2 l l l l
640 x 480/73 640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5 l l l l
640 x 480/75 640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5 l l l l
640 x 480/85 640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0 l l l l
800 x 600/56 800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0 l l l l
800 x 600/60 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 l l l l
800 x 600/72 800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0 l l l l
ENGLISH - 231

(kHz) (Hz)
800 x 600/75 800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5 l l l l
800 x 600/85 800 x 600 53.7 85.1 56.3 l l l l
832 x 624/75 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3 l l l l
1024 x 768/50 1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 l l l l
1024 x 768/60 1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 l l l l
1024 x 768/70 1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0 l l l l
1024 x 768/75 1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8 l l l l
1024 x 768/82 1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0 l l l l
1024 x 768/85 1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5 l l l l
1024 x 768/100 1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 l l l l
1024 x 768/120 1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1 l l l l
1152 x 864/60 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 l l l l
1152 x 864/70 1 152 x 864 64.0 70.0 94.2 l l l l
1152 x 864/75 1 152 x 864 67.5 75.0 108.0 l l l l
1152 x 864/85 1 152 x 864 77.1 85.0 119.7 l l l l
1152 x 870/75 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0 l l l l
1280 x 720/50 1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 l l l l
1280 x 720/60 1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 l l l l
1280 x 720/100 1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8 l l l l
1280 x 720/120 1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6 l l l l
1280 x 768/50 1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 l l l l
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 l l l l
1280 x 768/60
1 280 x 768*4 47.4 60.0 68.3 l l l l
1280 x 768/75 1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3 l l l l
1280 x 768/85 1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5 l l l l
1280 x 800/50 1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 l l l l
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 l l l l
1280 x 800/60
1 280 x 800*4 49.3 59.9 71.0 l l l l
1280 x 800/75 1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5 l l l l
1280 x 800/85 1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5 l l l l
1280 x 960/60 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 l l l l
1280 x 1024/50 1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0 l l l l
1280 x 1024/60 1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 l l l l
1280 x 1024/66 1 280 x 1 024 72.3 66.3 125.0 l l l l
1280 x 1024/72 1 280 x 1 024 78.2 72.0 135.1 l l l l
1280 x 1024/75 1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0 l l l l
1280 x 1024/85 1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5 l l l l
1366 x 768/50 1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 l l l l
1366 x 768/60 1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 l l l l
1400 x 1050/50 1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9 l l l l
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0 l l l l
1400 x 1050/60 1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 l l l l
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 l l l l
1400 x 1050/72 1 400 x 1 050 78.8 72.0 149.3 l l l l
1400 x 1050/75 1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9 l l l l
1440 x 900/50 1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8 l l l l
1440 x 900/60 1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 l l l l
1600 x 900/50 1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5 l l l l
1600 x 900/60 1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0 l l l l
1600 x 1200/50 1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5 l l l l
1600 x 1200/60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 l l l l
232 - ENGLISH

(kHz) (Hz)
1680 x 1050/50 1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 l l l l
1680 x 1050/60 1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 l l l l
1920 x 1080/50 1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 l l l l
1 920 x 1 080*4 66.6 59.9 138.5 l l l l
1920 x 1080/60
1 920 x 1 080 *5
67.2 60.0 173.0 l ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/50 1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 l l l l
1920 x 1200/60 1 920 x 1 200 *5
74.6 59.9 193.3 l ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/60RB 1 920 x 1 200*4 74.0 60.0 154.0 l l l l
*1 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
*2 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
*3 YPBPR 4:2:0 format only
*4 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
*5 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
Note
ff A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is 1 920 x 1 200.
ff The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
ff When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.
ff When the DIGITAL LINK connection is made with the long-reach communication method, the signal that the projector can receive is up to
1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff Even if it is the signal listed in the list of compatible signals, it may not be displayed by the projector if the video signal is recorded in a
special format.
List of plug and play compatible signals

The following table specifies the video signals compatible with plug and play.
Signal with l in the plug and play compatible signal column is the signal described in the EDID (extended display
identification data) of the projector. For the signal without l in the plug and play compatible signal column, the
resolution may not be selected on the computer even if the projector is supporting it.
ffInput corresponding to each item in the plug and play signal column is as follows.
ggRGB2: RGB2 input
ggDVI‑D: DVI‑D input
ggHDMI: HDMI input
ggDIGITAL LINK: DIGITAL LINK input
Scanning Dot Plug and play compatible signal

Signal name Resolution freq. clock
(SIGNAL FORMAT) (Dots) Horizontal Vertical freq. DVI‑D HDMI DIGITAL LINK
(MHz) RGB2
(kHz) (Hz) EDID1 EDID2 EDID3 4K/60p 4K/30p 2K 4K/60p 4K/30p 2K
480/60i 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
576/50i 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
720
480/60i 15.7 59.9 27.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(1 440) x 480i*1
720
576/50i 15.6 50.0 27.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
(1 440) x 576i*1
480/60p 720 x 480 31.5 59.9 27.0 ― l ― l l l l l l l
576/50p 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0 ― l ― l l l l l l l
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 *2
74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 *2
74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0*2 74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0*2 74.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 *2
74.3 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0*2 148.5 ― l ― l l l l l l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 ― l ― l l l l l l l
ENGLISH - 233

(MHz) RGB2
3840 x 2160/24p 3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0*2 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
3840 x 2160/25p 3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
3840 x 2160/30p 3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0*2 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0 *2
297.0 ― ― ― ― l *3
― ― l *3
― ―
3840 x 2160/60p
3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 594.0 ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ―
3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 297.0 ― ― ― ― l *3
― ― l *3
― ―
3840 x 2160/50p
3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ―
4096 x 2160/24p 4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0*2 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
4096 x 2160/25p 4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
4096 x 2160/30p 4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0*2 297.0 ― ― ― ― l l ― l l ―
4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0 *2
297.0 ― ― ― ― l *3
― ― l *3
― ―
4096 x 2160/60p
4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0*2 594.0 ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ―
4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 297.0 ― ― ― ― l *3
― ― l *3
― ―
4096 x 2160/50p
4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0 594.0 ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 400/70 640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 400/85 640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 480/60 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 l l l l l l l l l l
640 x 480/67 640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
640 x 480/73 640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5 l ― l l l l l l l l
640 x 480/75 640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5 l ― l l l l l l l l
640 x 480/85 640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
800 x 600/56 800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
800 x 600/60 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
800 x 600/72 800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
800 x 600/75 800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5 l ― l l l l l l l l
800 x 600/85 800 x 600 53.7 85.1 56.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
832 x 624/75 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3 l ― l l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/50 1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/60 1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/70 1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/75 1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8 l ― l l l l l l l l
1024 x 768/82 1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/85 1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/100 1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1024 x 768/120 1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1 l ― l l l l l l l l
1152 x 864/60 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/70 1 152 x 864 64.0 70.0 94.2 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/75 1 152 x 864 67.5 75.0 108.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 864/85 1 152 x 864 77.1 85.0 119.7 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1152 x 870/75 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1280 x 720/50 1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 720/60 1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 720/100 1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 720/120 1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/50 1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/60
1 280 x 768 *4
47.4 60.0 68.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/75 1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 768/85 1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/50 1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
234 - ENGLISH

(MHz) RGB2
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/60
1 280 x 800 *4
49.3 59.9 71.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/75 1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 800/85 1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 960/60 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/50 1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/60 1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/66 1 280 x 1 024 72.3 66.3 125.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/72 1 280 x 1 024 78.2 72.0 135.1 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1280 x 1024/75 1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1280 x 1024/85 1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1366 x 768/50 1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1366 x 768/60 1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/50 1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/60 1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 l ― l l l l l l l l
1400 x 1050/72 1 400 x 1 050 78.8 72.0 149.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1400 x 1050/75 1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1440 x 900/50 1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1440 x 900/60 1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 900/50 1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 900/60 1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1600 x 1200/50 1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1600 x 1200/60 1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
1680 x 1050/50 1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1680 x 1050/60 1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1080/50 1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1 920 x 1 080*4 66.6 59.9 138.5 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1080/60
1 920 x 1 080 *5
67.2 60.0 173.0 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/50 1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/60 1 920 x 1 200*5 74.6 59.9 193.3 ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―
1920 x 1200/60RB 1 920 x 1 200 *4
74.0 60.0 154.0 l ― l l l l l l l l
*3 YPBPR 4:2:0 format only
*4 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
*5 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
Note
ff A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is 1 920 x 1 200.
ff The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
ff When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.
ff When the DIGITAL LINK connection is made with the long-reach communication method, the signal that the projector can receive is up to
1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff Even if it is the signal listed in the list of compatible signals, it may not be displayed by the projector if the video signal is recorded in a
special format.
ENGLISH - 235
List of SDI compatible signals

The following table specifies the SDI signals that the projector can project.
Scanning freq. Dot clock
Signal name Resolution
Horizontal Vertical freq. Format Color space Sampling
(SIGNAL FORMAT) (Dots)
(kHz) (Hz) (MHz)
480/60i 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 27.0 SD‑SDI YCBCR 4:2:2 10bit
576/50i 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 27.0 SD‑SDI YCBCR 4:2:2 10bit
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 *1
74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0*1 74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 *1
74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0*1 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0*1 74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0*1 74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0*1 74.3 HD‑SDI YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 *1
74.3 3G-SDI Level-A RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0*1 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 *1
1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0*1 148.5 3G-SDI Level-A YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1080/60p
1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 *1
148.5 3G-SDI Level-B YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 3G-SDI Level-A YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
1080/50p
1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 3G-SDI Level-B YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 *1
2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0*1 74.3 3G-SDI Level-B RGB 4:4:4 10bit
2K/24p
2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 *1
2K/25p
236 - ENGLISH
Scanning freq. Dot clock

Signal name Resolution
Horizontal Vertical freq. Format Color space Sampling
(SIGNAL FORMAT) (Dots)
(kHz) (Hz) (MHz)
2K/30p
2 048 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 *1
2 048 x 1 080 54.0 48.0 *1
148.5 3G-SDI Level-A YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2K/48p
2 048 x 1 080 54.0 48.0*1 148.5 3G-SDI Level-B YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2 048 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 3G-SDI Level-A YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2K/50p
2 048 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 3G-SDI Level-B YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2 048 x 1 080 67.5 60.0*1 148.5 3G-SDI Level-A YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
2K/60p
2 048 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 *1
148.5 3G-SDI Level-B YPBPR 4:2:2 10bit
ENGLISH - 237
Chapter 7 Appendix — Specifications
Specifications
The specifications of the projector are as follows.
Power supply 100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz

PT-RZ990 820 W (8.6 A - 3.5 A)
PT-RZ890 770 W (8.1 A - 3.3 A)
Power consumption
PT-RZ790 630 W (6.5 A - 2.6 A)
PT-RZ690 565 W (5.9 A - 2.4 A)
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]: Approx. 0.5 W
Power consumption (during
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]: Approx. 7 W
standby)
When the [QUICK STARTUP] function is enabled: Approx. 110 W
Size 17 mm (0.67") (aspect ratio 16:10)
DLP chip Display system DLP chip x 1, DLP projection system
Number of pixels 2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
Electric zoom 1.7 to 2.4:1
Lens*1 F = 1.7 to 1.9
Electric focus
f = 25.6 mm to 35.7 mm
Light source Laser diode, 2 sets
PT-RZ990 9 400 lm
PT-RZ890 8 500 lm
PT-RZ790 7 000 lm
Light output*2*3
PT-RZ690 6 000 lm
(When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC] and [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING] is
set to [NORMAL])
Center to corner zone ratio*3 90 %
10 000:1
Contrast ratio*3 (When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING] is set to
[NORMAL] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3])
Projected image size*4 1.27 m (50") to 15.24 m (600")
Image aspect ratio 16:10
Projection method [FRONT]/[FLOOR], [FRONT]/[CEILING], [REAR]/[FLOOR], [REAR]/[CEILING]
For Taiwan: 2.0 m (78-3/4")
Power cord length
For other countries or regions: 3.0 m (118-1/8")
Outer case Molded plastic
Black model Black
Outer color
White model White
Width 498 mm (19-19/32")
Height 200 mm (7-7/8") (with legs at shortest position)
Dimensions PT-RZ990 / PT-RZ890 / PT-RZ790 / PT-RZ690 581 mm (22-7/8") (including standard zoom lens)
Depth PT-RZ990L / PT-RZ890L 538 mm (21-3/16") (excluding the Lens Mount Cover
PT-RZ790L / PT-RZ690L and optional lens)
Approx. 23 k] (50.7 lbs.)*5 (including standard zoom
PT-RZ990 / PT-RZ890
lens)
Approx. 22.2 k] (48.9 lbs.)*5 (excluding the Lens Mount
PT-RZ990L / PT-RZ890L
Cover and optional lens)
Weight
Approx. 22.1 k] (48.7 lbs.)*5 (including standard zoom
PT-RZ790 / PT-RZ690
lens)
Approx. 21.3 k] (47.0 lbs.)*5 (excluding the Lens Mount
PT-RZ790L / PT-RZ690L
Cover and optional lens)
PT-RZ990 / PT-RZ890 40 dB
When [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING]
PT-RZ790 36 dB
is set to [NORMAL]
PT-RZ690 35 dB
Noise level*3 When [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING]
36 dB
is set to [QUIET1]
PT-RZ990 / PT-RZ890
When [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING]
35 dB
is set to [QUIET2]
238 - ENGLISH
USA and Canada: Class 3R (IEC 60825‑1:2007)

Laser Class
Other countries or regions: Class 1 (IEC/EN 60825‑1:2014)
Laser Standard zoom lens, ET‑DLE020, ET‑DLE035,
Classification ET‑DLE055, ET‑DLE060, ET‑DLE085, Risk Group 2 (IEC 62471‑5:2015)
Risk Group ET‑DLE105, ET‑DLE150, ET‑DLE170
ET‑DLE250, ET‑DLE350, ET‑DLE450 Risk Group 3 (IEC 62471‑5:2015)
Operating
environment 0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)
Operating temperature*6
environment Operating
environment 10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
humidity
Power supply DC 3 V (AAA/R03/LR03 battery x 2)
Remote Operating range Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
control Weight 102 ] (3.6 ozs.) (including batteries)
Dimensions Width: 48 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 145 mm (5-23/32"), Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")
*1 The lens for PT-RZ990L / PT-RZ890L / PT-RZ790L / PT-RZ690L series is sold separately.
*2 Value is for the supplied standard zoom lens. The value varies depending on the lens.
*3 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2020 international standards.
*4 When the lens ET‑DLE055 is used, the maximum size is 5.08 m (200"). When the lens ET‑DLE035 is used, the size is 2.54 m (100") to 8.89 m (350").
When the lens ET‑DLE020 is used, the size is 2.54 m (100") to 10.16 m (400").
*5 Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*6 When using the projector at an altitude lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level, and the operating environment temperature becomes 30 °C
(86 °F) or higher, the light output may be reduced to protect the projector. When using the projector at an altitude between 2 700 m (8 858') and
4 200 m (13 780'), and the operating environment temperature becomes 25 °C (77 °F) or higher, the light output may be reduced to protect the
projector.
rrConnecting terminal
1 set (BNC x 5 (RGB/YPBPR/YCBCR x 1))

RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
<RGB 1 IN> terminal polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YPBPR signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
1 set, high-density D‑Sub 15 p (female)
RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
<RGB 2 IN> terminal polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YPBPR signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<DVI-D IN> terminal 1 set, DVI‑D 24 p, single link, DVI 1.0 compliant, HDCP compatible
<HDMI IN> terminal 1 set, HDMI 19 p, HDCP 2.2 compatible, Deep Color compatible
1 set (BNC)
SD‑SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
<SDI IN> terminal
HD‑SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
3G‑SDI signal SMPTE ST 424, 425-2 compliant
<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC IN>/ <SERIAL/MULTI
D‑Sub 9 p, 1 set each, RS‑232C compliant, for computer control
PROJECTOR SYNC OUT>
terminal
<REMOTE 1 IN>/ <REMOTE 1
M3 stereo mini jack, 1 set each, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control
OUT> terminal
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 1 set, D‑Sub 9 p, for contact control
1 set, RJ‑45, for network and DIGITAL LINK connections (HDBaseTTM compliant), PJLink (class 2)
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
compatible, 100Base‑TX, Art-Net compatible, HDCP 2.2 compatible, Deep Color compatible
1 set, RJ‑45, for network connection, PJLink (class 2) compatible, 10Base‑T/100Base‑TX, Art-Net
<LAN> terminal
compatible
Note
ff The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ENGLISH - 239
rrCompatible signal
For details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”
(x page 231).
RGB input
ff Resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200
ff Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less
ff PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
YCBCR/YPBPR input
ff Resolution: 480i/576i to 1 920 x 1 080
ff Dot clock frequency: 148.5 MHz or less
ff The HD/SYNC and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
DVI‑D input
ff Moving image signal resolution: 480i*1/576i*1 to 1 920 x 1 080
Still image signal resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
ff Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
HDMI input
DIGITAL LINK input
SDI input
SD‑SDI signal
HD‑SDI signal
3G‑SDI signal
240 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix — Dimensions
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inch)
538 (21-3/16")
43 (1-11/16")
200 (7-7/8")
249 (9-13/16")
116 (4-9/16")
21 (13/16")
221 (8-11/16") 457 (18")

442 (17-13/32")
498 (19-19/32")
* The above dimensions are obtained when the standard zoom lens is attached.
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
ENGLISH - 241
Chapter 7 Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket

ffWhen installing the projector to the ceiling, be sure to use the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis
Adjustment), ET‑PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)) specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. The Ceiling
Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H
(for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) is used in combination with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET‑PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
f Attach the drop-prevention set (flat washer and wire rope) that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket to the
f
projector. If you need the drop-prevention set (Service Model No.: TTRA0214) separately, consult your dealer.
ffAsk a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the
Ceiling Mount Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or the inappropriate choice of location
for installing the Ceiling Mount Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.
f Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualified technician.
f
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques. Do not use
electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
(Screw tightening torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
ffRead the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.
ffThe model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
rrSpecification for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
M6
12 (15/32")
242 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7 Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
rrDimensions for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
247(9-23/32")
234(9-7/32")
82(3-7/32")
124(4-7/8")
64(2-17/32")
274(10-25/32")
280(11-1/32")
414(16-5/16")
ENGLISH - 243
Index
Index
A <FUNCTION> button Protecting the registered signal 164
Remote control 31, 80
Accessories 29 Q
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 156
<AC IN> terminal 33, 58 [QUICK STARTUP] 144
Adjusting adjustable feet 49 G
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] 173 R
[GAMMA] 91
[ADVANCED MENU] 85, 105 [GEOMETRY] 99 [RASTER POSITION] 109
Application software 27 Read this first! 5
[Art-Net] 178 H Registering new signals 163
Art-Net 27, 217 <HDMI> button <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 36
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] 178 Projector body 34, 73 <REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal 36
[Art-Net SETUP] 178 Remote control 31, 73 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 229
[Art-Net STATUS] 179 [HDMI IN] 119 [REMOTE2 MODE] 156
[ASPECT] 97 Remote control 31
Automatic setup function 80 I
Remote control operations 79
[AUTO SETUP] 113 <ID SET> button Removing/attaching the projection lens 50
<AUTO SETUP> button Remote control 31, 81 Renaming the registered signal 163
Projector body 34, 80 [IMAGE ROTATION] 125 Resetting to the factory default 84
Remote control 31, 80 [INITIALIZE] 160 <RGB1/2> button
[AUTO SIGNAL] 113 Initial setting 61 Remote control 31, 73
B [INITIAL STARTUP] 149 <RGB1> button
[INPUT RESOLUTION] 106 Projector body 34, 73
[BACK COLOR] 126, 148 Installation mode 38 <RGB2> button
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] 114, 145 Projector body 34, 73
[BLANKING] 105 L
[RGB IN] 116
[BRIGHTNESS] 88 [LENS] 132 [RS-232C] 154, 225
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] 140 <LENS> button
Projector body 34, 74
S
C
[LENS CALIBRATION] 132 [SAVE ALL USER DATA] 160
Cautions on use 28 [LENS HOME POSITION] 132 [SCHEDULE] 150
Cautions when installing 23 [LENS TYPE] 132 [SCREEN SETTING] 112
Cautions when transporting 23 [LIGHT OUTPUT] 140 <SDI> button
Ceiling Mount Bracket 242 Light source indicator 208 Projector body 34, 73
[CLAMP POSITION] 106 List of compatible signals 231 Remote control 31, 73
[CLOCK PHASE] 99 [LOAD ALL USER DATA] 160 [SDI IN] 122
[COLOR] 89 [SECONDARY INPUT] 147
[COLOR CORRECTION] 112 M
Security 26
[COLOR MATCHING] 111 Main menu 84 [SECURITY] 87, 166
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] 89 Main power switch 33, 60 [SECURITY PASSWORD] 166
Connecting the power cord 58 Maintenance 210 [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 166
Connection 52 <MENU> button Selecting the input signal 73
[CONTRAST] 88 Projector body 34, 83 [SELF TEST] indications 213
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 168 Remote control 31, 83 <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 167 Menu item 85 terminal 225
[Crestron Connected(TM)] 199 [MENU MODE] 125 <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT>
[CUT OFF] 130 [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] 152 terminal 225
D N [SERVICE PASSWORD] 161
Setting ID number of the remote control 81
[DATA CLONING] 158 Navigating through the menu 83 Setting up 38
[DATE AND TIME] 149 [NETWORK] 87, 170 [SHARPNESS] 92
<DEFAULT> button Network connection 181 [SHIFT] 97
Remote control 31, 84 [NETWORK CONTROL] 176 <SHIFT> button
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] 95 [NETWORK SECURITY] 175 Remote control 31, 74
Deleting the registered signal 163 [NETWORK STATUS] 173 <SHUTTER> button
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 105 [NOISE REDUCTION] 93 Projector body 34, 79
[DIGITAL LINK] 170 [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] 148 Remote control 31, 79
DIGITAL LINK 27 [NO SIGNAL SETTING] 145 [SHUTTER SETTING] 127
<DIGITAL LINK> button [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] 149 [SIGNAL LIST] 87, 163
Projector body 34, 73 Specifications 238
Remote control 31, 73 O
sRGB-compliant video 95
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 120 <ON SCREEN> button [STANDBY MODE] 144
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] 171 Remote control 31, 79 [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 149
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] 170 [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 123 [STARTUP LOGO] 126
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] 171 On-screen menu 83 [STATUS] 156
Dimensions 241 [OPERATION SETTING] 133 <STATUS> button
Display language 86, 110 Optional accessories 30 Remote control 31, 81
[DISPLAY OPTION] 86, 111 Sub memory 165
[DISPLAY SETTING] 166 P
Switching off the projector 72
Disposal 28 [PICTURE] 85, 88 Switching on the projector 60
<DVI-D> button [PICTURE MODE] 88 Switching the input signal 73
Projector body 34, 73 [PJLink] 176 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] 92
Remote control 31, 73 [POSITION] 85, 97 [SYSTEM SELECTOR] 94
[DVI-D IN] 117 Power cord 58
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] 93 Power indicator 59 T
E Power on button Temperature indicator 208
Projector body 34 [TEST PATTERN] 87, 162
[EDGE BLENDING] 106 Remote control 31 <TEST PATTERN> button
<ENTER> button Power standby button Remote control 31, 80
Projector body 34 Projector body 34 [TEXT CHANGE] 167
Remote control 31, 83 Remote control 31 [TINT] 89
[ETHERNET TYPE] 170 Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Troubleshooting 211
Expanding signal lock-in range 164 Bracket 242
Precautions for use 23 U
F
Projecting 73 [UNIFORMITY] 126
<FOCUS> button [PROJECTION METHOD] 131 Updating the firmware 202
Remote control 31, 74 Projector body 33 Upgrade Kit 230
[FRAME RESPONSE] 108 [PROJECTOR ID] 131 Using by connecting to the projector with a
[FREEZE] 129 [PROJECTOR NAME] 172 cable 36
Function button 80 [PROJECTOR SETUP] 86, 131
244 - ENGLISH
Index
W
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
129
Web control 184
[WHITE GAIN] 91
[WIRED LAN] 172
Z
[ZOOM] 98
<ZOOM> button
Remote control
31, 74
ENGLISH - 245
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol)

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Product Information (for Turkey only)

AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Web Site : https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
© Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. 2022
Panasonic Connect North America

Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102
TEL: (877) 803 - 8492
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3
TEL: (905) 624 - 5010
W0720NL4042 -PT

Panasonic PT-RZXXX Series Manual EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic PT-RZXXX Series Manual EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic PT-RZXXX Series Manual EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Model No. PT-RZ990

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

[GEOMETRY] 99 [DATA CLONING] 158

Read this first!

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN

Indicated on the projector

Indicated on the projector

For North America

(for other countries or regions)

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)

WARNING (USA and Canada)

This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

For USA-California Only

For Australia Only

WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A COIN BATTERY

FCC NOTICE (USA)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

English Manufactured by: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Importer for UK:

Français Fabriqué par: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Español Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Magyar Gyártotta: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

rrHazard distance (IEC 62471-5:2015)

Projection lens Model No. Risk group

THIS PROJECTOR MAY BECOME RG3 FOR PROFESSIONAL USE

PROJECTION INTERCHANGEABLE EST UTILISÉ À CONDITION QUE

PRENEZ CONNAISSANCE DE LA DISTANCE DU RISQUE AVANT DE

DIESER PROJEKTOR KANN ALS RG3 NUR FÜR DIE PROFESSIONELLE

本投影機使用可換式投影鏡頭，且投射率大於 2.2 時，屬於僅

To remove the battery

Remote Control Battery

Fig. 1 Fita Isolante

rr Remoção das baterias

rrIllustrations in this manual

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

For details, refer to the corresponding pages.

High luminance and high contrast 1. Set up the projector.

5. Switch on the projector.

7. Select the input signal.

▶▶The maintenance cost for long-term

Precautions for use

Cautions when transporting

Lens protection material

rrDo not set up the projector outdoors.

rrDo not set up the projector in the following locations.

rrProjection in all 360° direction is possible.

360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted

rrCautions when setting up the projector

Adjustable feet Adjustable feet

Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet

ffDo not stack projectors on top of each other.

500 mm (19-11/16") or longer 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer

500 mm (19-11/16") or longer

100 mm (3-15/16") or longer

ffDo not install the projector in a confined space.

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN